201

Darkroom Handbook

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 1/201

Page 2: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 2/201

The New Darkroom Handbook

Focal Press

A Complete Guide

to the Best Design,

Construction,

and Equipment

Joe DeMaio

Robin Worth

Dennis Curtin

Boston Ox for d Johannesburg Melbourne N ew Delhi Singapore

Page 3: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 3/201

Focal Press is an imprint of Elsevier

Copyright 0 998 by Elsevier.

All rights reserved.No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a

retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by a ny means, electronic,

mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written

permission of he publisher.

Permissions may be so ught directly from Elsevier’s Science & Technology

Rights Department in Oxford, UK : phone: (+44) 1865 843830, fax: (+44)

1865 853333, e-mail: [email protected]. Yo u may also complete

your request on-line via the Elsevier Science homepage

(http://www.elsevier.com),by selecting ‘Custom er Support’ and then

‘Obtaining Permissions’.1@ This book is printed on acid-free paper.

Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication DataDeMaio, Joe (Joseph J.,), 1944-

The new darkroom handb ook; a complete guide to the best design,

construction, and equipment‘ Joe De Maio, Roberta W orth, Dennis Curtin.

p. cm

Includes index.

ISBN 0-240-80260-8 (paperback: alk. Paper)

1. Photography-Studios and dark rooms-Design and construction-

Handbooks, manuals, etc. I . Worth, Roberta (Roberta A,), 1962

11. Curtin ,Dennis P. , 1941-

TR560.D43 1998

111. Title.

77 1 4 - d ~ 2 97-24670

CI P

British Library Cataloguing-in-Publication DataA catalogue record for this book is available from the B ritish Library.

The publisher offers special discounts on bulk orders of his book.

For information, please contact:

Manager of Special SalesElsevier Science

200 Wheeler Road

Burlington, MA 01803

Tel: 781-313-4700

Fax: 781-313-4802

For information on all Focal Press publications available, contact our World

Wide Web homepage at http://www.focalpress.com

1 0 9 8 7 6

Printed in the United States of America

Page 4: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 4/201

To the Girls

Chiara Lue and India Sirnone

Page 5: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 5/201

Page 6: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 6/201

Building a Sink Stand 96

Installing Counters 98

Building a Print-Drying Rack

Making the Dry ing Frames 102

Building a Light Box 104Mounting the Enlarger I 0 6

Building an Adjustable Enlarger

Air Quality I10

Light-Proofing I I 2

Those Added Comforts I 1 4

100

Baseboard I 0 8

7 Processing Equipment

116

Sinks I18

Water Quality I 2 0

Temperature Regulation I 2 2

Automatic Temperature Regulation

ProcessingTrays and Tongs I26

Wet-Side Accessories I 2 8

Roll Film Tanks and Reels I 3 0

Washers 132

Timing Systems I 3 4

Chemical Storage and Waste

Disposal 136

124

8 Enlarging Equipment 10 Print Finishing 168

Enlargers I 4 0

Enlarging Lenses I 4 4Easels 146 Framing 176

Focusing Magnifiers I 4 8

Negative Cleaning and Dusting

Printing and Exposure Controls

Negative Storage and Proof

138 Dryers 170

Mounting 172

Matting and Storing Prints I 7 4

150

152

Printers 154

I I The Digital

Darkroom 178

Introduction to the Digital Wor ld

Digital Equipment I 8 2

Printing the Digital Image I 8 4

Index 186

180

9 The Color Darkroom

156

Introduction t o Color I 5 8

The Color Darkroom 160

Color Enlargers 162

Color Analyzers and Calculators

Drum and Tank Color Processors

164

166

V

Page 7: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 7/201

This page intentionally left blank

Page 8: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 8/201

Preface

Though it seems as if the world of

photography is constantly changing,

in fact, very little of the basic process

is different from the one invented by

Henry Fox Talbot in the nineteenth

century. This is especially true for

darkrooms. (See the illustrations, on

the next few pages, of the darkroom

of the 188Os-look fam iliar?) Yes,

there are different kinds of materials

and new, fancier equipment used in

making images, but mostly things

have remained the same-negative,

paper, three chemicals. However,

there is now the beginning of a revo-

lution in photography-the digital

photographic revolution. Even

though this revolution has not im-

pacted most amateur photographers

it will not be long before its effects

will be felt by all of us. In recognition

of this, and in an effort to keep up

with some of the new types of mate-

rials-especially the Kodak RA color

system-and to eliminate some out-

dated equipment, the authors have

decided to issue an updated version

of this book. To address heightened

concerns about the environment,

the new version also contains a sec-

tion on the environmental impact ofthe darkroom.

A positive side effect of the digital

revolution in general has been the

ability for people all around the

world to communicate quickly and

inexpensively through the Internet .

Images, as well as ideas, can now be

swapped across continents without

the need for packaging, mailing, or

even leaving your home. In an effort

to take advantage of these new possi-

bilities, we’ve replaced the chapter

on “Darkrooms of the Professionals”with “Darkrooms Around the

World.” Many of the images in this

section were transmitted to the au-

thors from across the planet via the

Internet. They were then converted

to B/W and enhanced using Adobe

Photoshop (See Chapter 11, “The

Digital Darkroom”) where neces-

sary. ,~

As with previous editions, this

book is still for those who wish to re-

sist the temptation to let the camera

and the photofinisher do all the

work in making photographs. It is

for those who want to experiencethe full range of the photographic

process.

The professional, the advanced

amateur, or the merely curious real-

ize that the only way to make a pho-

tograph look the way they want it to

look is by making it themselves. Neg-

atives or slides are only the starting

point in producing an image that

conveys a desired feeling or idea.

The machine processing available

from commercial sources, while

sometimes remarkably good, is al-

ways set to a mechanical standard.

Custom processing, even if you

could convey exactly what you want

the print to look like, is generally too

expensive. The best solution is to

build your own darkroom, ensuring

that, with some practice, the print

you obtain is the one you want.

Building a darkroom can be an

intimidating thought. The informa-

tion on how to d o it well is scattered

throughout photographic literature.The vast majority of this information

has traditionally been transmitted

verbally from one photographer to

another. The Darkroom Handbook

was the first serious attempt to

gather together in one source the

ideas and techniques that have been

developed over the years by trial and

error. It was the result of the efforts

of many photographers who have

overcome the difficulties of locating

a darkroom in a bathroom, kitchen,

bedroom, or basement of a house orapartment. Almost any problem you

might encounter in building a dark-

room has been encountered by oth-

ers and successful solutions have

been devised. This book is a compi-

lation of those successful solutions

from which you can benefit.

Those interested in building a

darkroom are confronted with many

problems, such as: where it should

be located; installing partitions,

plumbing, and electricity; and

choosing appropriate darkroom

equipment. This book is a compre-

hensive treatment of darkroom de-sign, construction, and equipment.

It is the end result of the trials and

tribulations of many people who dis-

covered solutions after long hours

and many mistakes, and who have

also been willing to share this infor-

mation freely with others. New prod-

ucts have been included and prod-

ucts no longer available have been

dropped. The primary criterion for

a product’s inclusion rests with its

proven acceptance and reliability. It

would not be possible to include all

of the products that are available

today, but you can be assured that

those featured here are produced by

reputable manufacturers. The intro-

duction of Kodak’sRA color-process-

ing system has further simplified

and improved the technique of

color printing a nd is treated herein

for that reason.

A new section has been added to

cover some of the possibilities al-

lowed by the greatest change to pho-

tographic processing that has oc-

curred since the last edition of’this

book-the ability to digitize a photo-

graph and manipulate it with a desk-

top computer. It is no longer neces-

sary to have the resources of a major

film studio or printing company to

be able to afford a machine that will

allow you to have a new and almost

unlimited type of control over an

image. This change brings with it

new equipment requirements for

processing images. Inputting imagesinto a computer and outputting

them (the counterpart to traditional

printing) are handled by equipment

that works without the necessity of a

d a r k space. There are no real chem-

icals, but now we must deal with

inks. What will the new “darkroom”

be called? Only time and the imagi-

nation of its users will tell.

vii

Page 9: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 9/201

In roduct on

Throughout the history of photog-

raphy, the process of producing a

photographic image has been split

into two parts-one done in the

camera and the other in the dark-

room. It is not always easy to decidewhich has more effect on the final

“look” of the photograph. With the

camera, one makes an initial deci-

sion that has a profound effect on

the image-choice of subject, com-

position, and so on. Th e options for

altering the image, and thus how it is

perceived, that are provided by the

darkroom (tone, contrast, density,

cropping, etc.) can have an equally

profound effect. In this age of the

digital manipulation of images, the

actual photograph may only be the

raw material in the production of a

much more complicated image.

Both cameras and darkrooms can

be extremely crude and still pro-

duce fine images. Many of the great

images throughout the history of

photography have been produced in

odd darkrooms under the most try-

ing circumstances. Some have even

been scary. Imagine using a dark-

room wagon pulled up to the battle-

field during the Civil War. While

shells burst outside, you are desper-

ately trying to coat a glass plate to be

used in the camera, or developing

one just exposed! All the while, you

are making sure the entire plate is

still wet! However, a good camera

and a good darkroom allow the pho-

tographer to concentrate on what is

really important-the process of

producing an image. While it would

be difficult for most of us to build a

camera (ba rring those enduring

pin-hole cameras), the building of adarkroom can be both easy and sat-

isfymg. It separates the total amateur

from the serious photographer.

Building your own darkroom is a rite

of passage to a new world of possibil-

ities.

It is the purpose of this book to

make that passage as simple and sat-

isfying as possible. This book uses

ideas that have been tried and used

successfully by o ther photographers

to produce darkrooms that are func-

tional, personal, efficient, and inex-

pensive. It shows how to tailor yourdarkroom to your space, wherever

that might be.

Because a significant part of the

time in producing an image is spent

in the darkroom-the time in the

camera may only be 1/125th of a

second!-all obstacles to the pleas-

ant and efficient workings of that

space should be removed. Planning

and forethought are the essential in-

gredients to the successful comple-

tion of any project, and it is no less

true of darkroom construction. Thetime spent before any physical work

is done is often the time best spent.

This book gives guidelines and many

useful hints for planning a dark-

room, and for how the resulting

plan can be brought to fruition.

You should start by brainstorming

and daydreaming about your ideal

darkroom. Then slowly whittle it

down based on the realities of space,

time, a nd finances. The dreaming

phase should not be neglected, be-

cause you may surprise yourself with

what you can actually have. It often

takes only a simple solution to allow

yourself a luxury you once thought

impossible to obtain. A darkroom

does not have to be all stainless steel

an d fancy electronics. There is no

real correlation between money

spent and quality of image pro-

duced. Darkrooms have existed in

all places and with all degrees of so-

phistication. It’s not the money that

makes your darkroom a great placeto work, it’s the planning and per-

sonal touches that make a space

truly your own. Your darkroom rep-

resents your tastes and personal feel-

ings as much as your photographs

do.

In the final chapter on digital

darkrooms, we will see how you may

create a “darkroom” that is nothing

more than a table top with a few

pieces of electronic equipment on it.

Under this system, there is no need

to isolate yourself in a dark space,

surrounded by large and sometimesnoisy pieces of equipment that are

based on concepts more than 100

years old. Here there are no chemi-

cals, no odors, no skin irritations.

And yet, perhaps the feeling of actu-

ally making something by hand is

lost. Is the manipulation of a mouse

and the insertion of a piece of paper

in a machine as satisfjang as working

on an image under the light and

time constraints of a traditional ex-

posure? Is there more satisfaction in

sloshing a piece of paper around ina series of trays? Each photographer

must decide for him or herself, but

there seems to be nothing quite so

satisfying to human beings as actu-

ally touching things with their

hands.

So, roll up your sleeves, dig in ,

and build yourself a darkroom.

It’s easy to forget that photographytoday, where the taking of the pictureand the development of the negative aretwo distinct acts, i s quite different fromwhat it used to be. During the wet-plateera of photography (c. 1853- 890) thecharacteristics of the glass plate nega-tives were such that the negative glasshad to be coated with the emulsion, theexposure made, and then the develop-

ment completed while the plate was st i l lwet. Since the negatives could not betaken back to a darkroom for develop-ment, the only solution was to take a

darkroom along. Early photographersmust have looked strange to passersby,but they did come up with creativesolutions to problems that make ourspale by comparison.

...Vlll

Page 10: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 10/201

Page 11: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 11/201

Page 12: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 12/201

Page 13: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 13/201

I Darkrooms of the Famous

Page 14: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 14/201

Contents

Ha rry Callahan

Aaron Siskind

Berenice Abb ottW. Eugene Smith

During the writing of the origi-

nal Darkroom Handbook, the au-

thors interviewed the photogra-

phers in this section (except

Eugene Smith who had recently

passed away) in person. The

photographs, comments, and

observations, though recorded

in the present tense, are no

longer current. However, the

authors feel that the informa-

tion contained herein is an his-

torial document and have de-

cided to leave it unto uched.

Page 15: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 15/201

Harry Callahan

To get to Harry Callahan’s dark-

room you walk up three flights of a

wide-pine spiral staircase to the top

of a house on a historic street in

Providence, Rhode Island. Just

across the hall from the darkroom ishis workroom, a spacious oak-

floored room with a view across

Providence to the Capitol building

and the hills beyond.

Callahan moved to this house in

1964. He made the down payment

with money earned from selling

prints. He was delighted with his

darkroom, because it was the first

darkroom he had with a sink in it.

He had been printing for almost

twenty-five years without a sink-

bringing water into a room, carrying

it out to dump it, washing prints in

the bathroom. “Ihad always had just

makeshift things. To have a sink was

remarkable.” But when he finally

had a real darkroom, he laughs, “I

felt I was more on the spot. I really

had to produce.”

He is spending more time in his

darkroom these days. The good

news is that he is selling prints; the

bad news is that he has to spend time

in the darkroom that he would

rather spend photographing. “Idon’t mind printing, though I’ve

gotten tired of it lately because I’ve

been doing so much of it. I think I

like ust about everything about phc-

tography. I don’ t even mind mixing

chemicals.”

He has a new washer to help cut

down on the drudgery: a Zone VIworkshop washer that will take about

thirty 8 x 10 prints, and one that is

much more efficient than his old

one, which took six hours to wash

twelve prints.

Other equipment that makes his

darkroom work easier is a water tem-

perature regulator (to set washing

temperatures), a sodium safelight

(he likes the brightness of it com-

pared to regular safelights), and air

conditioning (because the top floor

of the house gets very hot in the

summer). One amenity is the view

from his workroom; he likes to make

a print, then be able to take a little

break by walking out of the dark-

room to look out the window.In retrospect, Callahan might

have built a bigger sink. An 8’ sink

seems very big when you’ve never

had a sink before, but in recent years

the need for archival processing

(which, among other things, re-

quires two trays of fixer and a large

washer) has made his sink seem too

small.

Callahan never really designed

his darkrooms, but just used what-

ever space was available. He says he

knows the present darkroom could

be reorganized more efficiently, es-

pecially with more shelves and better

storage, but “you get used to some-

thing, you reach, and you can find it

in the dark. I think I have a very

dumb darkroom, but I like it.”

Callahan in H i s Darkroom. Harry

Callahan’s darkroom is as warm andfriendly as Harry himself is. There are

no elaborate arrangements, and theequipment s as straightforward as hisprints. It is clearly a room for a photog-rapher whose ultimate concern is theprint and not the hardware necessary toproduce it.

4

Page 16: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 16/201

The Too-Short Sink. The wooden sink built for Harry by a boat-builder is used tohold processing rays and a Zone VI workshop print washer. The narrowness of the

sink requires that prints be processed in two cycles with a change in solutions inbetween.

Th e Dry Side. Harry has placed hisenlarger adjacent to the sink, only a fewfeet from the developer tray, minimizingsteps from one to the other. The en-larger is set on a sturdy table, and paperand chemicals ar e within easy reach.

A Gallery in the Darkroom. The wall covered with posters and announcementsprovides a backdrop for a stool on rollers for those long sessions a t the sink, a wall-mounted air conditioner, and a wire strung across the room with film clips andclothespins used to hang negatives and prints to dry.ime and Temperature. The ar t -

work by Harry’s child when she wasyounger almost hides the temperatureregulating valve, which Harry thinks i s a

great convenience, an old wall clockused to check processing imes, and asome&hat battered print-viewing light.

5

Page 17: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 17/201

Aaron Siskind

Aaron Siskind lives on a quiet resi-

dential street in Providence, Rhode

Island, a long stone’s throw from

Harry Callahan. Like Callahan,

Siskind came to Providence to teach

at the Rhode Island School of De-sign. Siskind is much more profi-

cient with a camera than he is with a

hammer, so much of the actual con-

struction of the darkroom was done

by his students.

Like many well-known photogra-

phers, Siskind did not have a com-

plete darkroom for most of his ca-

reer, and within the past few years he

has had both the time and inclina-

tion to construct one. The increas-

ing sale of his prints led to long

hours in the darkroom to meet the

demand, and making things com-

fortable and efficient became of

prime importance. Siskind made the

entire darkroom one that could be

worked comfortably from a sitting

position. Both the enlarger base-

board and the sink are set lower

than would be required for a stand-

ing position. In addition, the en-

larger has a focus attachment that al-

lows the machine to be focused

without having to reach way up for

the knob. This also allows for easy fo-

cusing when very large enlarge-

ments are being made and the knob

is raised high above the baseboard.

Siskind spends a great deal of

time making prints and rewashing

and reprocessing older vintage

prints that were made in the days be-

fore archival processing. In tune

with modern theories, he no longer

dry mounts; he uses his dry-mount

press only to flatten prints. As he says

about the new archival processingtheories, “They really have us run-

ning scared.”

One of the unexpected fringe

benefits of buying an older home

was the walk-in cedar closet in which

he now stores many of his own prints

and prints from his collection.

6

The Wet Side. The sink has several water outlets so that print washing and otherprocessing steps can be handled simultaneously. The Zone V washer is connected tothe temperature-regulating valve so that washing temperatures do not have to becontinually monitored. Rubber hoses are used to connect all of the outlets and aremore than long enough to reach to the f loor of the sink. This arrangement allowswater t o be x e d anywhere in the sink without moving trays around and also pre-vents splashing. A shelf over the sink provides convenient storage of frequently usedchemicals and print tongs.

Print Drying. One of the several bathrooms in the house serves the dual functionof print-drying room and bathroom. Siskind denies that he dries prints while sitting inthe tub, but in any event, the ferrotype plate used as a squeegee board allows therunoff water t o drain directly into the tub and down the drain. The print-drying r ack

made from aluminum frames and fiberglass screens is conveniently located next t othe squeegee area. The line above the tub can be used for drying film, and the excesswater that runs off takes the same exit into the drain system.

Page 18: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 18/201

Page 19: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 19/201

Berenice Abbott

When the snow is melting in Boston

and spring is in the air, the lakes and

rivers of Blanchard, Maine, are still

locked in ice. Backed against the Pis-

cataquis River, in a small hollow in

the hills, stands an old frame farm-house that is now the home and

workspace for Berenice Abbott. A

magnificent back room hangs over

the banks of the river, and the sound

of water rushing over the rocky river

bed can be heard throughout the

house. Berenice Abbott has inte-

grated photography into her daily

life as can be seen by the way work-

spaces are located in central parts of

the house.

Abbott first became involved with

photography as an assistant to Man

Ray in Paris in the 1920s, and her in-

volvement and contributions still

continue. She became well known in

the 1920s for her portraits in Paris,

and in the 1930s she produced a

large series documenting New York.

She also has devoted a large portion

of her career to scientific photogra-

phy using strobe and multiple expo-

sures to illustrate the laws of physics.

She discovered the photography of

Eugene Atget, whom she met in

Paris, and later brought his work to

the attention of the photographicworld. Atget is now considered to be

one of the leading photographers in

the history of photography, and his

images have been a major influence

on many contemporary photogra-

phers.

Abbot’s home in Maine is isolated

from the hectic pace of Paris and

New York, but it provides the quiet

needed to concentrate on her pho-

tography. The entire top floor is de-

voted to the office, workspace, and

darkroom. An old wood-burning

stove heats the floor, and the atmos-

phere is warm and relaxed. Prints by

Abbott and Atget are piled on the

desk and nearby work surfaces. The

darkroom, dominated by a Durst 8 x

10 enlarger, is connected to the of-

fice area by a light trap.

T h e Enlarger . The huge Durs t 8 x 10

enlarger rises throug h a ho le cut in the

ceil ing. W ith ou t the added height, the

maximum size of prints would be sub-

stantially reduced. The large baseboard

built in to the enlarger eliminates the

need for a nearby counter, because

focusing magnifiers, timers, and oth er

pieces of equipment can fit in th e space

no t occupied by the easel.

Duckbo ards . The bot tom of the sinkis l ined wi th duckboards, which reduce

wear and tear o n the waterproof sink

coating. They also raise the trays so that

water f lowing from the washer through

the sink does n o t float the trays. These

duckboards are made in sections so

they can be easily removed and stored.

A stool i s on the left, used to s i t on

when it is no t holding extra pr int -pro-

cessing trays.

P r i n t Drying. Abbott uses fiberglass screens and frames for pri nt drying. Ho weve r,

she has eliminated the need for a rack t o hold the screens by gluing small spacers o n

the bot to m four corners of each frame, s o that when they are set on to p o f each

other, the frames are separated by a few inches to al low for air to circulate.

8

Page 20: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 20/201

The Wet Side. This view, with theenlarger baseboard on the right, showsthe sink and the light-trap entrance tothe darkroom. The space directly underthe sink i s used for tray and chemicalstorage. Floor mats are located in frontof all work areas to make standing a t

the sink and enlarger more comfortable.Aprons and gloves hang on the wall tothe right.

The sink has several outlets forwater, and pegs mounted into the wallprovide a convenient place to storemixing graduates, funnels, and otherwet-side paraphernalia. The line sus-pended over the sink is used t o dry filmso that the runoff water drains directlyinto the sink. A bright bulb on the left i s

used for print viewing when printscome out of the fixer.

The Office and Darkroom. The topfloor, containing an office and dark-room, is heated by a large wood-burn-ing stove, and the entire area, exceptthe darkroom, is flooded with naturallight. This view shows the stairs leadingdown to the main part o f the house.The desk used for paperwork is on theright, as is a storage closet.

0

9

Page 21: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 21/201

W. Eugene Smith

W. Eugene Smith had a reputation

as one of the leading American pho-

tojournalists from before World War

I1 until his untimely death in 1978.

His involvement with photography

began when, as a young man, he wasinterested in becoming an aircraft

designer. In the course of taking

photographs of airplanes, his goals

changed and he became committed

to photography as a form of visual

communication. H e was best known

for his photo-essays for LifeMagazine

(“Spanish Village,” “Country Doc-

tor,” etc.), and he also produced ex-

tensive photoessays, such as “Mina-

mata,” which were published in

book form.

Smith disliked making prints but

never backed off from the work in-

volved. It was only through total con-

trol of the entire process that he

could be assured his images would

convey the meaning he intended.

One of the ways he relieved the mo-

notony he found in the work was to

listen to music while printing, and it

was said he had a collection of over

25,000 records to choose from. He

also occasionally watched television;

as shown in the accompanying pho-

tographs, he covered the screen

with a safelight filter to protect hisunfixed images from unwanted ex-

posure.

Over the years Smith developed

his printing techniques to match his

vision. He made extensive use offer-

ricyanide to bleach out his high-

lights and open up shadow areas.

He also used diffusion screens of ei-

ther wire mesh or black stockings,

moved rapidly back and forth be-

tween the lens and easel during the

exposure, to soften and break up

the image grain.

Because he did considerable

print dodging and burning, he

equipped the darkroom with a foot

switch that controlled the enlarger

and left his hands free to dodge and

burn. As a final step, he toned most

of his prints in selenium toner to en-

rich the midtones and blacks.

Bleaching prints with ferricyanide takestime; the print is repeatedly bleached,then placed in the hypo to stop thebleaching action. One print from thefamous series on Albert Schweitzerrequired over five days to produce toSmith’s satisfaction. The stool and sinkrai l are wide enough to lean on, makingthings more comfortable for extendedprinting sessions.

This view gives a good indication of theoverall size of the darkrcom. Smithliked the darkroom to be large andcomfortable, with plenty of room tomove about. A towel rack was mountedconveniently over the sink and safelightsabound. A string running the length ofthe room overhead controlled thewhite lights so they could be turned onfrom almost any location in the dark-room.

10

Page 22: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 22/201

Smith used tw o trays, one above theother, as a print washer. Freshly fixedprints are placed in the bottom tray,which rinses with overf low from thetop tray. After partial washing, the finalwash was given in the top tray. Thewater entered and left the top tray byway of the Kodak siphon attached. Thelower tray overflowed into the sink.

The dry side was a place to enlarge and

finish prints, and also doubled as anoffice. The multiple use sometimes led toconfusion, but everything was there . . .somewhere. Numerous focusing devicesare in evidence. Smith’s favorite enlargerwas an old Leitz Valloy, which is nolonger made, equipped with a Minoltacolor-corrected lens designed for colorprinting.

Here Smith examines a print duringprocessing. The glass panel immediatelybehind the developing trays is used tohold the print while applying ferr i-cyanide. A thermometer used to moni-tor the temperature of water comingfrom an outlet can been seen in thebackground. All water outlets are at -

tached to rubber hoses, which r e s t inthe sink bottom when not in use.

Page 23: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 23/201

Page 24: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 24/201

Contents

Philippe Moroux

Famiglia Trentotto

Ron HarrodRobert Mann

Page 25: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 25/201

Philippe Moroux

Born in Le Havre, France, Philippe

Moroux now lives in the Nether-

lands with his Dutch wife. Philippe

teaches photography and is the head

of the photography department at

St. Joost Art School in Breda,Netherlands. You can visit his home

page at: http:/ /www. knoware .nl/

users/philippe/

Philippe is a photographer who

wants to be as intimately involved in

the creation of a photograph as he

can be. He also wants the place in

which he photographs to take as ac-

tive a part as possible. In his own

words, “th e concent ration of the

photographer, between the expo-

sure and the final result, should not

relax. A complete cycle of image cre-

ation would have to happen at the

same place without discontinuity.

The photographic image would

then be able to become impreg-

nated with the location, and the con-

frontation of the photographer with

his subject would last more than

1/125th of a second.”

To affect this deeper involvement

with the process, Philippe has re-

turned to the days when a photogra-

pher carried a darkroom with him,

performing the entire process from

exposure to print at on e place. He

uses alternative processes such as the

Kallitype, a method of creating im-

ages using iron-sensitive salts that

break down during development

and leave behind a lovely warm

brown image. Any type of paper can

be impregnated with the sensitive

emulsion, contact printed with the

negative in the sun, and then devel-

oped under a dark cloth. Philippe

will travel to an isolated spot, createan image, and then mail the image

to a friend on his way home.

Philippe uses a 4 x 5 pinhole cam-

era and, in his only concession to

modernity, 4 x 5 Polaroid negative

film. He has also used a 2m x 2m x

3m pinhole camera in which RC

photographic paper is used as the

negative, and development takes

place inside the camera with a

sponge.

Here is a paraphrase of Philippe’s

description of how an image came to

be made in Etretat, on the coast of

France:

I photographed with a 4 x 5 pinhole

camera on Polaroid Type 55 film. I

developed the Polaroid and washed

the negative with sea water. I dried it

in the open air in a metallic frame. I

contacted this film on previously

kallitype-coated watercolor paper

with a contact frame and sunlight. In

my own shadow, and under a one-

square-meter darkcloth, I washed the

exposed kallitype with fresh water

(the cliff in Normandy provides a lot

of sources) and fixed it with a verypoor concentration of sodium thio-

sulfate. A ten minute wash in sea

water (sea water is a very good hypo-

clearing agent) and a final fresh

water wash before drying in the sun

completes the process. On my way

home, the print was directly @ Philippe Moroux

stamped, addressed, and sent to a

friend.

Philippe and Anne. Philippe Morouxwith his young daughter Anne. Note theold typewriter! In the color version of

this photograph, Anne i s wearing yellowshoes.

How would you like to find one of

Philippe Moroux’s warm and exotic

prints in your mailbox!

Rowing to the Location. An image Philippe made while rowing to the remotelocation where he has chosen to work.

0 hilippe Moroux

14

Page 26: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 26/201

Developing the Kallitype. Philippedevelops a kallitype inside a woodenbox. 0 Philippe Moroux

Preparing to Develop. Philippe onthe seacoast preparing to develop a

negative and make a kallitype print.Notice how little equipment it takes,and the wonderful windblown feeling ofworking outdoors.

0 PhilippeMoroux

The Equipment. The complete kit

necessary for exposing and printing a

kallitype on location. Except for thepinhole camera, which appears to behomemade, all the r es t is simple, readilyavailable darkroom equipment.

0 Philippe Moroux

Large Pinhole Camera. A sequenceof shots taken on video of Philippe anda group using the large pinhole camera.The fact that it is homemade is readilyapparent. 0 Philippe Moroux

Sample of Work . A sample of what one of Philippe’s friends might find in the mail!The BNV reproduction does not do justice to the warmth of the brown tone of theimage. 0 Philippe Moroux

Page 27: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 27/201

FamigliaTrentotto

Famiglia Trentotto is an images stu-

dio, originally set up in Milan, Italy

in 1989. Mimo Visconti, Paolo

Mazzo, and Francesco (Chicco) Di

Loreto work together to produce

photography based on the manipu-lation of any kind of visual surface.

They take images and enliven them

using darkroom manipulations. To

see some of their very exciting work

dial up their home page at: http://

www.photographers.com/famiglia

tren totto/

The darkroom is situated within a

200 square meter photography stu-

dio. Its position at the center of the

studio (occupying about 10 square

meters, or 2m x 5m) is symbolic of

the central position of darkroom

work for Famiglia Trentotto’s im-

agery. It is a B/W darkroom that is

used for a wide variety of techniques,

ranging from traditional printing, to

antique processes, to more impro-

vised experimentations. The term

they use for their creative work is “re-

search.For enlargers they use the Durst

Laborator 138 S and the Durst M

805, both of which are set up with

condenser heads. The maximum

size print that can be accommo-

dated in the darkroom is 50 x 60 cm,

or about 20 x 24 inches. That’s a sub-

stantial size print for such a small

darkroom! They use variable con-

trast paper, which they control with

Ilford filters. Discarded chemicals

are not simply washed down the

drain but are stored in sealed drums

and hauled away by specialized con-

tractors. All the electrical, plumbing,

an d ventilation systems were in-

stalled by the photographers at

Famiglia Trentotto themselves to

meet their specific needs. As can be

seen from the accompanying pho-tographs, Famiglia Trentotto consid-

ers all the structures that make up

the darkroom to be temporary and

subject to changes of use and posi-

tion according to need. For in-

stance, the table where they place

the chemical trays also often be-

comes the surface used for the re-

touching a nd “elaboration” of the

images. As with all practical solu-

tions to space problems, it does vio-

late some of the rules of placement,

but i t works for them.

Here is what the members of

Famiglia Trentotto have to say about

what the darkroom means to them:

“We consider the darkroom to be

the space in which the idea of the

image is revealed, and this possibility

is enriched if our other photogra-

pher friends, whom we allow to use

our equipment, participate in o ur

space. Often the darkroom repre-

sents for us the point of departure of

the final image, which we arrive at

via post-production procedures that

are not necessarily tied to traditional

photographic techniques, such as

the use of a photocopier, hand col-

oring, and the general ‘mistreat-

ment’ of good B/W prints.”

This interesting and free philoso-

phy is clearly the reason why

Famiglia Trentotto produces such

exciting images.

Sample of Work . A sample of thetype of work that Farniglia Trento ttoproduces.As can be seen, it is highlyabstracted but s t i l l recognizable. It

retains the look of a traditional photo-graph while giving the viewer a totallydifferent feeling.

FamigliaTrentotto. The three pho-tographers who comprise FamigliaTrentotto: Mimo Visconti, Paolo Mauo,Francesco (Chicco) Di Loreto. The self-portrait gives some idea of the type ofphotographs that Famiglia Trentottomakes.

16

Page 28: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 28/201

Overall View. A n overall view of the darkroom . The some-what temporary nature of the ro om is clearly visable. The

lack of a clearly defined w ed dry side arrangement is also

indicative of the free style o f Famiglia Tren totto.

Enlargers. The t w o enlargers tha t are used by FamigliaTren tot to are seen here wi th the Laborator on the lef t and

th e M 805 on the r ight.

Processing/WorkArea. A view back towards the area

that is used for bo th processing and photographic manipula-

tion. Storage beneath th e table gives conve nient access to

bo th the processing and the enlarger area.

Wo rk Area. The area tha t Famiglia Tre nto tto uses for both

processing and manipulations. They defy th e r ule of separating

dry- and wet-side activities w it h th e same casual ease tha t

they defy the comm on rules of photographic convention.

17

Page 29: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 29/201

Ron Harrod

Ron Harrod got his start in photog-

raphy by taking an adul t education

course in 1975. Since then he has

had seven or eight darkrooms, rang-

ing in size from 42 sq. ft. to 120 sq. ft.

Ron is extremely inventive and veryhandy. He always comes up with the

simplest and least expensive solution

to any problem. Ron is responsible

for the darkroom-in-a-closet pho-

tographs in Chapter 3. In 1981,Ron

moved his entire life aboard a 31-

foot sailboat. Th e boat proved to be

workable for a darkroom, which Ron

says is, “though not the smallest per-

haps the oddest. Developer and stop

were in the main cabin, fix and wash

were outside in the cockpit.”

Ron presently lives on a 36-foot

pilothouse trawler named “Essence.”

Since space is at a premium on any

boat, the darkroom is set up as

needed in the main salon, the

largest room on the boat. Since

light-proofing is impractical, Ron

does his darkroom work at night.

Film loading is done in a changing

bag. Occasionally, it is necessary to

drape a window to block direct light

from other boats or nearby docks.

The “dry side” is the main salon

table a nd allows negative selection

and enlarging while sitting down.

The galley serves as the “wet side”

and is compact but very efficient.

Boats present some problems not

shared by land-based darkrooms.

For instance, water supply is limited

and boats have expensive pumps

that are not meant to run continu-

ously. For print and film washing

Ron brings a hose aboard. He

spends most of his time in Florida,

so temperature control is an issue.Using a cold water tray under the de-

veloper tray keeps the solution at the

right temperature. Ice is added as

needed. Ron finds that on the

hottest nights he can print for four

hours with a ten-pound bag of ice.

He uses several layers of mosquito

netting on a pull-out berth for print

drying.

Ron tries to keep things as simple

and inexpensive as possible. “Pho-tography equipment, as well as boat-

ing equipment, is usually way over-

priced. Kitty-litter trays are fine for

developing. My light table is fash-

ioned from a loaf pan. For timers, I

Ron H arr od wi th his boat “Essence”

docked o n a river in Florida.

Ron Ha rrod relaxing with his ever pre-

sent cup of Chinese tea behind the “d ry

side” of his dark room set up and ready

t o go.

use a digital dashboard clock set to

count seconds. Safelights are simply

red light bulbs.”

Although Ron is primarily a B/W

photographer, he will do color on

occasion. Most of his work has beenfor conservation causes-the Florida

Panther, the Florida Key Deer, the

International Iguana Society, the

Octagon Wildlife Refuge, and Ba-

hamas National Trust.

18

Page 30: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 30/201

Ron Harrod’s Darkroom. The “dry

side” showing Rons’ c. I935 Leitz Foco-

mat enlarger (purchased for $65 n a

junk shop!) fitted w ith a dichroic head.

No te the loaf pan l ight box.

Ron’s photograph of a tiger.

Ron Harrod’s Darkroom. Th e

“wet-side” setup in th e b oat’s galley.

Kitty-l itter trays are used fo r developing

chemicals.

19

Page 31: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 31/201

Robert Mann

Robert Mann is an American living

and doing his art in Paris, in the tra-

dition of such luminaries as Ernest

Hemingway, Gertrude Stein, and

Ezra Pound. Since Robert is a pro-

fessional printer for the likes ofHerb Ritts, Helmut Newton, Pamela

Hanson, and a whole bevy of fashion

photographers worldwide, he is an

expert on both darkroom technique

and darkrooms themselves. Over the

years, he has buiksix darkrooms in

such cities as New York, LosAngeles,

and Paris.

The Paris darkroom itself is in

what must have been a maid’s quar-

ters, which was complete with a

shower and hot-water heater. It

seems that in classic French apart-

ments, the maid’s quarters are typi-

cally adjacent to the kitchen. This fa-

cilitated plumbing the darkroom,

since all the basic requirements-

hot and cold water and drain-were

right where they needed to be. The

French use the English system of

plumbing. Robert brought over his

own filters and lime magnets from

the States. Robert is quite tall, so all

work surfaces are at 42 inches. He

had his sinks custom-made in Eng-

land and brought them to Paris him-

self. Robert broke down the shower

wall and extended the sink into it.

Before doing anything else, he tiledthe floor in basic, clean white. As

Robert puts it, “I find that a dark-

room should be painted stark white

on as many surfaces as possible with

more than adequate lighting. Flat

black is only localized around the

enlarger. There is no nee d for all

surfaces to be black, as long as the

room is light tight. If the lights are

off, it should be darker than dark.

With all the white surfaces, jus t a

couple safelights are needed, be-

cause the light will bounce around

nicely.”

The layout is in classic workflow

order in a clockwise direction

around the darkroom. As with many

photographers, Robert wishes for

more table space. That would enable

him to make mural-sized prints with-

out the present difficulty that his

limited space causes.

Robert uses an old Omega D2 V

enlarger that he found in Los Ange-

les. It had been sitting in a box for

fifteen years without ever being

used. As Robert says, “It’s impecca-

ble, and I maintain a very special re-lationship with it.” Robert has re-

placed the enlarger’s condenser

light source with a cold light source

that has an internal stabilizer. How-

ever, he is ready to upgrade to one of

the new multigrade cold-light heads.

He is beginning to accept that there

are exquisite multigrade printing

papers available and to enjoy the

flexibility of splitgrade burning and

dodging.

The darkroom is equipped with a

JOB0 CPP2 processor that Robert

uses to develop 4 5 and 8 x 10 film.

His personal work is do ne with 4 x 5

an d 8 x 10 precision pinhole cam-

eras that he built himself. Robert has

started to experiment with color, but

is still working on platinum-palla-

dium, Kallitype, bromoil, and mono-

chrome carbon processes.

Robert Mann’s Darkroom: Dry

Side. This i s the “dry side” of Robert’s

darkroo m. No tice that as many pieces

of equipm ent as possible are wall

mounted-the enlarger, time r, tele-

phone-to save precious co un ter space.

Since the c oun ter tops a re 42“ to ac-

commodate Robert’s height, there i s

plenty of storage space underneath.

No te the many types of paper available.

The enlarger area i s painted black to

minimize light scattering. The key t o this

working darkroom i s neatness.

20

Page 32: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 32/201

Robert Mann’s Darkroom: We t Side. The “wet-side’’ sink of the darkroom i s

placed at the point where the shower was in order t o make plumbing easier. Notethe soil pipe right a t the point where a drain is necessary. There are light-tight venti-lation baffles in the walls and chemical storage under the high sink. Again, the feelingof efficiency and organization ets you know that this is a working darkroom.

21

Page 33: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 33/201

3 Ideas for Placement

Page 34: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 34/201

Contents

Darkrooms in Closets

Darkrooms in Kitchens

Darkroom s in B athrooms

Darkrooms in Spare Rooms

Workrooms

Page 35: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 35/201

Darkrooms in Closets

Most closets hardly have sufficient

space for clothes and other items

needing storage space. Occasionally,

however, you may be lucky enough

to have a very large walk-in closet, or

a long closet with sliding or foldingdoors that can be spared for a dark-

room or a portion of a darkroom. In

most cases (but not all), working in a

closet means you will have a “dry

darkroom.” Prints will be stored in a

water tray after fixing, then carried

in batches to another room for wash-

ing. If you are printing in color, all

you have to do in the closet is make

the exposure and insert the print

into a light-tight drum (see Chapter

9, ‘The Color Darkroom”). All other

processing can be d one where there

is more room. Closets are generally

so small that careful planning is re-

quired to make one acceptable for

use as a darkroom.

Enlarger

Where possible, the enlarger should

be wall-mounted, because it can be

difficult to find a small table that is

steady enoug h for it. O r you can

build a sturdy counter on which toset the enlarger a nd its baseboard.

As closet space is at a premium, an

adjustable enlarger base is not prac-

tical, since 11 x 14 prints can nor-

mally be made on the baseboard,

and there probably will not be space

to process larger prints.

Counter Tops

Shelves to hold the processing trays

should be built at a convenient

height, often counter-top height.

You will require a minimum of four

trays (developer, stop bath, fixer,

and water-holding trays).

Storage

If the enlarger and processing trays

f i t , you could store everything else

outside of the darkroom. If you have

a tendency, however, to see howmany people will fit in a phone

booth, you can build storage shelves

over cabinets in whatever space is

available.

Ventilation

Working in a small space increases

the problems of fumes and vapors.

Good ventilation is almost a neces-

sity for closet work, so plan on in-

stalling a fan and air vents in the

closet.

Lights

The white light in the closet could

be string-operated if the switch is

outside the room. You can pick up a

screw-in, string-operated adaptor at

any hardware store if one is not al-

ready in the socket.

An extension cord can be run

into the room to provide electricity

for the enlarger, timer, and safe-lights. Be sure it has sufficient space

so the door does not crush it when

closed. If the cord is slammed by the

door a few times, it could create a

short circuit and possibly be a fire

hazard.

Long Closet

Very Small Closet

ENLARGER

\-RAY RACK

Very Small Closet. The most space-saving design consists of an enlarger and a

tray rack that permits trays to be stackedon top of each other, which reduces theamount of counter space required. Timersand safelights should be wall-mounted, so

they don’t use the scarce counter space.As you can see from the elevation, stor-age of paper and chemicals can bearranged on shelves under the enlarger. Asplashboard made of plywood or masoniteshould be installed between the enlargerand the processing rays to reduce therisk of contamination.

Long Closet. These are ideal, but gener-ally require that the entire room in whichit is located be light-proofed. The closetcan have wet and dry sides facing eachother with one o r the other permanentlyinstalled in the closet. If the wet side is

built in, plumbing can be added. The en-larger can be mounted to an old (solid)desk and pushed into place when needed.The desk can also be used for storage.

ENLARGER SPLLlsHBOARD TRAVS

24

Page 36: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 36/201

Walk-in Closet A Closet Darkroom

I f I l l L / h - o I

Walk-in Closet. These are generallylarger-sized closets that permit slightlymore flexibility than a small closet does.An L-shaped darkroom layout is mostcommon, unless the closet is large enoughto have a wet side and a dry side sepa-rated by an aisle. Storage and splashboardwould be the same as for a very small

closet.

Before and After. These before and

after photographs show how Ron Harrod

installed his darkroom in a small closet.The sliding doors were removed (folding

doors would no t have t o be) and the

entire room was light-proofed. Plumbing

was hooked up t o nearby pipes and a sink

constructed ou t of a plastic sign. The

plumbing system connects and discon-

nects with threaded fittings, so if the

darkroom has t o move, the plumbing can

go with it.

Photographs, Ron Harrod

\ SAFELiGHT SCREWEDiNT0 C€iUNG SOCKET

Closet Elevation

WHITELlGHfyirn STRING

CH€MlC4LS?VRAGE

A Closet Darkroom. A few innova-tions make even a small closet darkrooma feasible option. Wall-mount your timerand safelight or screw a safelight into theceiling fixture. Use a tray rack to stackyour three trays. Keep a bucket nearbyfor fixed prints that wi ll be washed else-where. Construct a splashboard o pro-tect your dry side. Store your chemicalsbelow the counter. When set up, run anextension cord under the door to plug inyour electrical equipment.

Closet Elevation. Ifyou build a perma-nent darkroom in a closet, the spacebelow the enlarger makes an ideal place tostore chemicals and trays. The tray ladderused to hold the trays vertically is de-scribed in Chapter 6 . A piece of panelingbetween the enlarger (dry side) and theprocessing rays (wet side) preventssplashes.

25

Page 37: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 37/201

Page 38: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 38/201

L-Shaped Kitchen

TA8LE TOPENLARGER

u WALL mo o "

L-Shaped Kitchen. In a kitchen suchas this, the ideal place for the enlarger is

on the counter between the wall andthe stove. Barring that, a wall mount is

possible, or the enlarger can be placedon a sturdy table in the center of theroom, convenient to the developer tray.

Single-Wall Kitchen

Single-Wall Kitchen. In many smalapartments, the kitchen occupies a

single stretch of wall. In this case, theonly place for the enlarger is on a facingtable or on a wall mount.

A Kitchen Darkroom. A kitchenmay seem t o be the ideal location for a

darkroom, but it i s often time-consum-ing to light-proof. Ifyou do use yourkitchen, avoid chemical contaminationof surfaces and utensils used in prepar-ing food. No matter what shape yourkitchen is, a sturdy sheet of plywood is

often handy to use as extra counterspace on top of the stove (but turn off

pilot lights on a gas range) or as a bridgeto span the gap in a corridor-typekitchen.

Desk-Mounted Enlarger. An old-style oak desk, commonly found insecondhand stores or flea markets,makes an outstanding enlarger stand.This one, in the R&D darkroom of

Saunders PhotolGraphic, was paintedmat black, but the desk can be used ini t s natural finish as well. The drawersprovide handy, dust-free storage forlenses and accessories. The enlargershould be securely bolted t o the top.Do not use wood screws. A sheet ofpegboard on the wall behind the en-larger, as shown, provides a handy placefor negative carriers.

Photo by Metzger Studios, Rochester , N e w

York

A Kitchen Darkroom

SAFELlGtiT SCREWEOINTO CEILING SOCKET1

PRINT- VIEWING

\

IWER OR IVALL CLOCK/

27

Page 39: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 39/201

Page 40: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 40/201

Sink Over Bathtub

h SHOWER DIVERT€R

SPLASH BOARD

II CHAIR RAILI I

FITTING TO ADAPT

HOSE TO FAUCET

OUTLET7XISTING BATH

Sink Over Bathtub. A rail installedaround the bathtub can be used tosupport a removable wooden darkroomsink. The sink can drain directly into thetub below, which eliminates any plumb-ing problems. Water can be obtainedfrom the bathtub outlet or the showerhead. The shower head might not haveit s own mixing valves, so temperature

regulation can be difficult. The printwasher can be located either in the sinkor in the tub below.

A Bathroom Darkroom. A bath-room is often the best location for a

darkroom. It has the necessary plumb-ing, waterproof surfaces, and can easilybe made light-proof. A bathtub makes a

good wet side: it’s waterproof, and has

running water and a drain. You can layyour trays out in the tub, or you cansave your back by placing them on asheet of plywood covering the tub, forthe dry side. You can place your en-larger directly on top of your sinkspace, or you can f i r s t cover the sinkwith a sheet of plywood. I t ’s importantthat the enlarger be very stable; anyvibration will mean unsharp, blurredprints.

A Bathroom Darkroom

Bathroom D ry Side

I

Bathroom Dry Side. This elevationshows how the toilet can be enclosed in

a cabinet for an adjustable enlargerbaseboard. Instructions on how t o buildone of these units are given in Chapter6.The sink can be covered with a pieceof plywood t o increase the amount ofdry-side shelf space.

/] ......................I i I )

TRAY WITH SIPHONCONNECTED72)FAWE7

PLYWOOD 804RDTOHOLD TRAYS

\

29

Page 41: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 41/201

Darkrooms in Spare Rooms

In most apartments and many

homes, it is inconvenient to convert

a closet, kitchen, or bathroom into a

darkroom. Therefore, one of the

rooms that is normally used as a bed-

room or spare room can be the loca-tion for the darkroom.

Unlike bathroom and kitchen lo-

cations, a spare room generally does

not have a water source. This means

that either the darkroom must be

dry and the prints washed in an-

other room, or a water source must

be brought into the room.

Another problem with converting

spare rooms is minimizing the dam-

age caused to the room so it can be

reconverted back to its original pur-

pose should the darkroom be

moved. Or perhaps the spare room

must serve a number of functions si-

multaneously. At the very least, i t

may have to be both darkroom and

workroom.

Anthony Hernandez, a Los Ange-

les photographer, was confronted

with this problem when moving intoan apartment. His solution was to

convert a bedroom into a combina-

tion office, workroom, and dark-

room. The room functions as an of-

fice and general working space

during the day and is converted to a

darkroom at night by putting down

the window shades.

The room is one of the major

spaces in the apartment and was de-

signed to be an elegant addition to

the living space, with utilitarian fea-

tures concealed in the overall de-

sign.

The Entrance. The entrance to thedarkroom does not give a feeling that

you have stepped into a different world.The room still seems to be part of theapartment and functions as a livingspace as well as a darkroom.

Organization. The darkroom is de-signed with the dry side on the left, thewet side on the right, and theoffice/workspace a t the other end ofthe room. The blinds are pulled at nightto convert the room into a darkroom.Because they are not totally light-proof,it is not possible to print during daylighthours.

30

Page 42: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 42/201

The Dry Side. The dry side of theroom consists of storage cabinets and alarge formica-covered counter. Thecabinets supporting the counter and theseparate cabinet underneath are used tostore equipment and prints. The t rack

lights on the ceiling are used when theroom functions as an office, and thedry-side safelight rests on the counteralong with the enlarger and timer.

The We t Side. The wet side of a

darkroom is the place where, in mostdarkrooms, the greatest disorder ap-pears. The photographer solved theproblem by designing the wet side so

that the majority of the equipment s

hidden from view when the darkroom i s

not in use. The exhaust fan is located inthe ceiling over the sink, the print-viewing light on the right end of the sinkcomplements the overall style of theroom, and even the print drying screens

directly over the sink do not detractfrom the room’s clean appearance.

The Wet -Side Equipment. Openingthe doors over the print-drying rack

reveals the wet-side timer, safelights,and equipment storage. When closed,the equipment s again concealed fromview.

31

Page 43: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 43/201

Page 44: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 44/201

This photograph taken from GeorgeTice’s office shows the rest of Tice’s

print-finishing area. On the left ar e theprint-drying screens in an open frame.Paper is stored at the far end of theroom and the right side is devoted to

paper trimmers and the dry storagearea.

Neal Slavin’s prints are given their finalwash in the print-finishing area. Thewindow has sliding red plexiglass panelsthat are used as a “pass through” forprints from the darkroom t o thewasher. The red plexiglass acts as asafelight, so the lights in the print-finish-

ing room do not affect the sensitivematerials in the darkroom (color mater-ial excepted). The light entering thedarkroom through the panels gives theroom a pleasant open feeling. The cabi-net on the lower left contains print-drying racks concealed behind theswinging door.

Naomi Savage’s workroom i s on theground level and looks out on a land-scape that includes her husband’swelded stainless steel sculptures. Theroom is bright and full of light. This viewshows a paper trimmer in the fore-

ground and a large expanse of opencounter space used for print finishing.The stairway rises to a storage area.

Mike Shaw and Peter Rayment handlethe print finishing at the Sutcliffe Gal-leries in Whitby, England in a well laid-out workroom. Spotting and pr int fin-ishing are done on a sloped draftingtable with strong natural light enteringfrom a nearby window. Shaw is shown

framing prints on a large work table.Supplies are stored close by on theracks behind him.

33

Page 45: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 45/201

4 Designing the Room

Page 46: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 46/201

Contents

What Are Layoutsand Elevations? 0 40How to Do Layouts 0 42Planning Grids 44

Dry-Side Cutouts 0 46Wet-Side Cutouts 48Light-Trap Cutouts 50

Light-Trap and

Drying Rack Cutouts 52Preparing Elevations 0 54

Page 47: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 47/201

Page 48: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 48/201

Layouts

I I

0 0

Q 1 I - - - - - -@ @ IWet-Side Elevation

Dry-Side Elevation

Layouts. Ifyou were directly abovethe room and peering down throughthe ceiling from point A in the figure onthe opposite page, you would see howitems were arranged on the f loor of theroom. This view is what is called a layout

or floor plan, and i t s preparation i s thef i r s t step in the design of any living orworking space. At this stage, the physi-cal placement of equipment is deter-mined to allow for working comfort byeliminating unnecessary steps.

Wet-S ide Elevation. If you were tostand outside of the darkroom and lookthrough the transparent wall from pointB in the illustration, you would see thewall against which the wet side of thedarkroom i s built. This view i s called anelevation and shows only the fronts ofsinks, shelves, and other items on the

wall. It i s used to plan the placement ofequipment and cabinets and should bebased on the previously prepared lay-out.

Dry-Side Elevation. Standing outsideof the darkroom and looking in frompoint C would show the dry-side eleva-tion. This elevation will contain theenlarger, dry-side counters, enlargerbase, and under-counter storage.

37

Page 49: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 49/201

How to Do Layouts

The preparation of a layout is the

first step in building any darkroom.

This section has been designed to

make this preparation as fast and

easy as possible. It consists of grids

and cutout parts drawn to the ap-proximate scale they will occupy in

the actual darkroom. Both the grids

and the cutout parts are drawn to a

scale of 1/2" to 1' in the actual dark-

room. You might want to make a

photocopy of both the grids and

cutouts rather than cut up the book.

You can begin your layout in one

of two ways. You can either draw the

size of the room you plan to use on

the grid, or you can assemble all of

the elements you plan to use and

then draw a room sufficiently large

to hold them. The first approach is

used when you have a room to con-

vert in which you do not want to

change any of the partitions. The

Large Darkroom Layout

second is used when you plan to par-

tition the darkroom off from a

larger area such as a basement, and

therefore the actual size and propor-

tions of the room are initially unim-

portant.If you plan to convert an existing

room, start the layout by drawing the

outline of the room on the grid.

Measure the length of all four walls,

then freehand sketch the room out-

line using one square on the grid to

represent one square foot in the

room. Next, indicate all existing

doors, windows, and other major

features in the room, locating them

on the drawing in the same scale

they represent in the room.

After the room outline is drawn,

use the equipment checklist on the

facing page to inventory the equip

ment you have, or plan to have in

the future. The amount of material

sbm LIGNT PRINTVIEWINO LIGHT L m r

CWIPUENT/PANIC lyKw

Typical Darkroom Layouts. Thesetwo darkroom layouts illustrate theextremes that you are likely to en-counter. The smaller the space available,the more creative you will have to be.Fitting everything in a large room is

relatively easy compared t o fitting it

into a 3' x 4' closet. Both, however, canbe done and done well.

to be accommodated a nd the size of

the prints you plan to make are the

key ingredients in planning a work-

able room. Some of the pieces of

equipment directly affect the

amount of either counter space orstorage space needed in the dark-

room, so be sure to make provisions

for these items.

All of the major darkroom ele-

ments can now be cut out and

placed on the grid. The ability to

shift and move them about will

speed the time it takes to arrive at a

final floorplan.

If you plan to include any equip-

ment not provided in cutout form,

or if your equipment is to be a dif-

ferent size, you can make your own

cutouts by drawing them to the same

scale of 1/2" to 1'.

Small Darkroom Layout

ENLARGER

38

Page 50: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 50/201

Darkroom Planning Checklist

Before beginning the preparation of the layouts and elevations, it is helpful to make a complete inventory of the materials and

equipment that you have o r might eventually want to accommodate i n the darkroom. It makes good sense to plan ahead andprovide space for equipment that will be added during the life of the darkro om. This information is also helpful in planning thetype of storag e space, sink size, and o the r elements of the darkroom based on the actual equipment to be used.

Al- M a yr ea dy W i l l A d d

E q u i p m e n t M o d e l Have Bui ld La ter

D r y S id e

Enlarger, 35mm

Enlarger, 4 x 5

Enlarger, other

Enlarger lensesEnlarger coldlight h ead

Enlarger color head

Polycontrast filters

Color correcting filters

Exposure meter

Color analyzer

Voltage regulator

Easel. 11 x 14

A l - M a yr ea dy W i l l A d d

E q u i p m e n t M o d e l Have Bui ld La ter

Funnels

ApronsTowels

Timer

Chemical storage containers

Squeegee boardPrint squeegee

Pr in t washer

Negative drying cabinet

W o r k r o o m

Film

PaDerEasel, 16 x 20

Easel 20 x 24

Easel, other

Focusing magnifier

Negative proof printer

Contac t minte r

Print dryer, electric

Print dryer , screens

Dry mount ing press

Tacking iron

Mat board

M a t c u t t e r sPaDer safe

Enlarging timer

Footswitch

Scalelbalance

Printing control devices

Dust sprayslbrushes

PaDer trimmer

Scissorslfilm cutt er

Densitometer

Film cassette opener

~ ~~ ~

W e t S i de

35mml2 ?/ieveloping tanks

Roll film w ash er

Sheet film tanks

Sheet f ilm han gers

Film squeegee

Processing trays

Mural processing trayldrum

Color processing drum

Color drum aeita tor

Print tones

Immersion heaters

Water chiller

Recirculating heater

Stabilization processor

Thermomete r

Gloves

Stir r ing rods

GraduaCes

Spotting brushes

Spotting dyes

Negative storage system

Print storage containers

Safelight filters

Unmixed chemicals

Negative clips

Couvstand

B u i l t - i n Eauiamenf

Counte r s

Sink

Enlarger base, adjustable

Light box

Towel rack

Shelf over sink

Shelf over enlarger

Ventila tor fan

Air conditioner

Light-proof louversDehumidif ier

Light-proof door

Safeliehts

Water temperature regulator

Valve

Water f i l ters

Footswitch for enlarger

Supply cabinets

Electrostatic air cleaner

Print viewing l ight

39

Page 51: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 51/201

Planning Grids

Page 52: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 52/201

Page 53: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 53/201

DrylSide Cutouts

Preparing Layouts:

Things to Remember

When working on your layout, there

are certain things to keep in mind:

Enlarger If you plan to make very

large prints, the enlarger should be

placed where it can be tilted hori-

zontally to project the image on a

facing wall. Enlargements of up to

20" x 24" can usually be made by

making an adjustable enlarger base

(see Chapter 6) or by using a wide-

angle enlarging lens.

Aisles. There should always be suffi-

cient room in the aisle to allow for

free movement but no t so much that

additional steps are necessary to

move from the enlarger to the sink.

Aisle width for a one-person dark-

room is whatever is comfortable,

usually between 30" an d 36".

Doors and Drawers. Be sure to allow

for door a nd drawer openings. If an

aisle is too narrow, cabinet doors

and drawers may not open com-

pletely without hitting the opposite

side. Be sure also to allow for print-

drying racks to pull ou t fully.

Wet and Dry Sides. Where space al-

lows, the dry and wet sides of the

darkroom could be on opposite

sides of the room, separated by a

center aisle. This reduces the possi-

bility of contamination.

Ideally, the developer tray should

be located directly opposite the en-

larger to reduce the number of

steps needed to go from one to the

other. If space is not sufficient to

separate them with an aisle, a parti-

tion of wood can be installed be-tween them to eliminate any possi-

bility of splashing.

Left-Handed? It is recommended

that if you are right-handed the

room be laid out so that work pro-

ceeds from the left to the right

(clockwise on the layout sheet) , and

if you are left-handed it could flow inthe opposite direction (counter-

clockwise).

Exits. All exits should open outward

so in case of emergency you can

leave the room with the least resis-

tance. Exits should also be suffi-

ciently large to allow for the move-

ment of equipment into and out of

the room without tearing down

walls.

Size. The size of the darkroom de-

pends, to a large extent, on the size

of the prints you plan on making. If

you are working primarily with 8" x

10" prints there is a strong likeli-

hood that you will someday want to

make larger prints, so accommodate

that possibility when planning the

room. It's easier to do it now than to

have to rebuild the darkroom later.

Darkrooms should not, however, be

larger than necessary. A large room

only makes you walk farther. The av-

erage darkroom will fi t well into a

space ranging from 6' x 7' to 10' x

12 ' , regardless of the print sizes

being made.

Working Space. Always remember

that most equipment also requires

working space. For instance, a dry-

mount press without a place to have

mat board, prints, and dry-mount

tissue nearby will be a constant irri-

tation.

42

Page 54: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 54/201

Enlargers

Enlargers. These enlarger cutouts are

based on the maximum size o f the

prints t o b e made. Enlargers are rela-

t ively smal l compared t o th e size o f the

easel, plus the handling ro om required

t o make prints o f a given size. The

enlarger c utouts are also based on th e

longest dimension of the paper to be

used so tha t bo th vert ical and horizon-tal prints can be made. If yo u norm ally

plan on making prints up t o I I x 14 bu t

occasionally make larger ones, you can

allow fo r the larger space wi th an ad-

justable easel base (see Cha pter 6).Wh en making an al lowance fo r the

enlarger, you should also be generous

with the w orking space o n ei ther side.

There should be sufficient ro om f or th e

maximum-sized paper yo u plan to use,

with unexposed paper ke pt on one side

and exposed on the other. T he space

required can be reduced by install ing a

l ight-proof drawer under the enlargerbase, thereby eliminating the require-

men t for co unter space to handle it.

However, the l ight-proof drawer wi l l

conflict wi th t he adjustable enlarger

base unless it is offset t o one side.

Page 55: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 55/201

Wet-Side Cutouts

Sinks

Processing prints requires a

minimum of three trays: for

developer, stop bath, and

fixer. There should also bea fourth tray to be used as a

holding-water bath for

prints prior to placing them

in the washer. Ideally, the

sink should allow for a fifth

tray to hold fixer, because

two-bath fixing is more ef-

fective and more economi-

cal. The sinks shown here

are designed to accommo-

date anywhere from three

trays to six, with an addi-

tional 30" space left forwashing. If you plan on

washing with an East Street

Gallery washer or some

other such space-saving

equipment, the 30" space

allowed can be greatly re-

duced. The sinks vary in

size, depending on whether

you plan to align your trays

in a horizontal or vertical

position in the sink, and on

the size and number of

trays you plan to use. If youplan on building your own

sink, and if space allows,

you should build the largest

size possible to accommo-

date expansion of your ac-

tivities. The actual cost of

the additional materials

and the additional labor re-

quired are minimal. If

space in your darkroom is

at a premium, you can save

sink space by using

Sinks for Processing Prints up to I I I' x 14"

//"x /4" 4 TRAYS UOU/ZONTAL

//'k 14" 5 TRAYS HOR/ZOAfirAL

//"x /4 I 4 TRAYS VERTICAL

// "x14" 5 TRAYS V€Rt/CAL

//"x /9 "SPACE SAV€I? 5 TRAYS

tray racks to hold

the trays one over

the other.

ll"x 4"SUP€R SPACE SAVER

3 TRAYS 6 TRAYS

// "x /4" SUPER SPACE SAV€U

44

Page 56: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 56/201

Sinks for Processing Prints up to 1 6 x 2 0

Page 57: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 57/201

Light-Trap Cutouts

Light-traps allow free access even

when light-sensitive materials a re ex-

posed. Light-traps are generally a

combination of doors and curtains,

or mazes that require no doors; the

configuration of the walls is enoughto prevent light from entering the

room.

The inside of a maze or trap

should always be painted a flat black

to reduce reflections, and tests

should be made to ensure that they

are light-proof. Film is especially sen-

sitive to light, even minor reflec-

tions, and mazes in particular

should be watched so that no reflec-

tions enter the room to fog the film.

A white line can be painted on

the inside walls of any light trap as a

guide. All door handles should also

be marked with phosphorescent

paint. Entering a maze directly out

of the bright sun can cause you to be

quite blind until your eyes adjust.

The white line will enable you to

enter without waiting for a complete

adjustment. In a short time, you will

be able to move around in the dark.

The accompanying mazes have

been drawn to scale providing for

30" of shoulder room. The mini-mum would be about 28", so slightly

smaller designs are possible. A sepa-

rate equipment door can be con-

structed in the maze to allow the

entry of larger equipment than the

light-trap will allow, and it can also

double as a panic door. As this door

will not be opened regularly, it need

not be hinged. A panel attached

loosely with small screws is quite ef-

fective and can be pushed out if a

fast exit is required. Make sure all

doors, including the equipmentdoor, open outward for safety.

Page 58: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 58/201

Page 59: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 59/201

Light-Trap and Drying-Rack Cutouts

S-TY?€ TRAP

w m URTAIN

t8

Page 60: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 60/201

FOR 4

//I5 4"PRINTS

FOR

20Ik2

DryingRacks. The drying racks shown here are made with fiberglass screens andwood or metal frames (see Chapter 6).Their capacity should be sufficient to holdprints from a normal printing session. The capacity of the drying rack depends on thehorizontal dimensions shown, as well as on the number of shelves allowed by thevertical height available to you. Ifyou normally work in more than one size print, youshould build for the larger size. The shaded areas indicate the space needed to pullthe rack out either horizontally or vertically. Once you have determined how a givenrack will be positioned in your darkroom, you can trim off the shaded area that willnot be used.

49

Page 61: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 61/201

Preparing Elevations

After the layouts for the darkroom

have been completed, work can

begin on the elevations for the dry

and wet sides of the room. Eleva-

tions are similar to floorplans except

they show the vertical surfaces of theroom rather than the floor. To pre-

pare elevations the first step is to

measure each wall's length and

height, then outline them on a sec-

tion of the grid paper using the scale

of 1/2" to 1'.When this is completed

you will have four rectangles (or

squares), each of which represents a

wall in the darkroom. Label one of

them wet side and one dry side, de-

pending on how they relate to the

floorplan. Now draw in all of the ex-

isting features of the room that af-

fect the darkroom design, such as

door openings, window openings,

plumbing outlets, sinks, and so on.

These items should be drawn to

scale and in their proper location in

the room. Measure their size and

placement and use the 1/2" o 1'

scale to locate them on the drawings

properly.

When the walls have been drawn

to scale on the grid, you can begin to

plan what the counters and sinks will

look like after they are installed. The

next step in preparing elevations is

to determine the height of the work

surfaces in the room. The height of

counters, sinks, and enlarger base-

boards determines to a large extent

how comfortable the darkroom will

be to work in. If they are too high o r

too low, great strain can be put on

the back and legs and cut your visit

to the darkroom short. Because this

decision is so critical it pays to make

it wisely. The normal height for work

surfaces is 36"above the floor, but

this is only a starting point. Comfortwhile working depends not only on

your height but also on the length of

your arms and legs. Until ail photog-

raphers are standardized, dark-

rooms cannot be.

Begin with the 36" indicated

height and make a temporary sur-

face at this suggested height. You

can do this by supporting a board

with books. Now try to lean on it and

move things about. See how com-

fortable the height is. Strain will

show only after a number of minutes

have passed, so spend some time to

see what your reaction is. If your

back is straight and your arms are

comfortable, the height will be right

for you. If not, raise or lower the

board until a more comfortable

height is found.

Transfer the ideal working height

to 'the elevations by drawing a line

on all wall surfaces to'represent that

height. Draw another line about 6"

above the floor line to indicate the

lowest level for the fronts of coun-

ters, sinks, drying racks, and so

forth. If they go all the way to the

floor, there will not be room for your

feet as you stand at the counter, and

cleaning the room will be much

more difficult, because you will not

be able to reach under the sink to

clean up spilled chemicals.

The We t Side

The wet-side elevation should show theplacement of the sink, shelves, wateroutlets, safelights, under-sink storage,and, if there is no other space available,

the print-drying racks.The sink bottom should be located a t

a distance slightly below the ideal work-ing height. The side walls r ise about 6"

above the bottom, and if the sink is toohigh it s difficult to reach over the sidewalls to reach the trays in the bottomof the sink.

Wa te r outlets: Ideally, there will be a

regulated outlet at one end of the sinkand an unregulated one a t the other.Both outlets should be at least 12"

above the sink bottom (or above the

duckboards, if you plan to use them) sothat large graduates can be placed underthem to be filled. Even better is to haverubber hoses attached to faucets. Whennot being used, they lie on the bottomof the sink. In use, they can fill graduatesas high as the hose is long.

Storage under the sink can be usedto hold processing rays, which can beseparated by thin sheets of masonite orplywood. The bottom of this tray-stor-age rack should slope toward the frontto allow for drainage when wet traysare stored. Preferably, trays should be

(continued on next page)

Th e Dry Side

The dry-side elevation will show thecounter, dry-side storage, and the en-larger mount and baseboard. If you planon using kitchen-type cabinets, they canbe drawn in so that their counters area t the height of the line drawn on theelevation to indicate working height.

Check to be sure the enlarger head canbe raised to i t s full limit, and use thechart on "Negative-to-Easel Distance"in Chapter 6 t o determine if you canmake the size prints you normally makeat the counter-top height. Perhaps yourenlarger head will hit the ceiling beforethe negative-to-easeldistance is suffi-cient to give you the size prints younormally make. If this happens, you havethree alternatives:

(continued on next page)

50

Page 62: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 62/201

left tilted on end in the sink to draincompletely prior to being stored.

Print-drying racks can be locatedunder the sink if there i s no room forthem outside of the darkroom (building

instructions are shown in Chapter 6).

Dowelscan be mounted into the wallson the sides or back of the sink toprovide a convenient place t o hanggraduates, funnels, tongs, and othersmall items for draining and storage. Besure t o place them where the drippingwater wi ll not contaminate processingtrays. A small trough can be fashionedunder the trays to funnel the waterinto the sink.

Exhaust vents or fans can be locatedover the sink to eliminate fumes and

water vapor. Never locate a fan thatblows air into the room over the sink,since that will just distribute the dustand vapor more widely. The wet sideshould always be used t o exhaust theair out of the darkroom.

Safelights should be indicated on theelevation and should be no closer than4' from processing rays or the enlargerbaseboard.

The shelves over the sink should behigh enough so that when trays are

stood on end to drain in the sink, they

will not hit them.

I. Cut a hole in the ceiling o allow theenlarger head to rise higher.

2. Lower the enlarger baseboard toincrease the negative-to-easel dis-tance.

3 . Use a wide-angle enlarging lens.

Normally the enlarger can be mounted

on the wall just above the counter top,or it can be se t directly on the counter.You may want t o build an adjustableenlarger base to provide for largerprints (see Chapter 6).

Determine the width of the enlargerarea based on the maximum-sized easelyou plan to use. Locate this area nearthe developing end of the sink, allowingfor room on either side of it for unex-posed and exposed paper.

DOWELS

HOLD

ro

FUffffELS,En : \

PRfNTORYfNGRACK

FOOTSPACE

TIMER9AFELfGHT

[MINIMUM OF

4' FROMBASEBOARD)

SAFELIGHT

ENLARGER

S7VRAGE

SHELF

SUPWRTS FOR VARIWSSMLF HENHE3

TORAGE

ADJUSTABLEENLARGERBASEBOARD(seepw8 IIZJ

51

Page 63: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 63/201

5 Building the Room

Page 64: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 64/201

Contents

Tools

Installing Partitions

Hanging Doors

Installing Sheetrock@

Getting to KnowYour

More About Your Plumbing

Typical Darkroom Plumbing

Roughing in the Plumbing

Installing Supply Lines

Installing he Drain

The EasyWay Out and

Unique Solutions

A Modular Plumbing System

Introduction to Electricity

Electricity in the Darkroom

Tools and Materials for

ElectricalWork

Wiring the Circuits

Modular Control Panel

Plumbing

Most communities require a

permit to do plumbing or elec-

trical work and in many cases re-

quire that the work be per-

formed or supervised by a

licensed electrician or plumber.

These legal requirements are

designed to ensure that the

work is done properly and

safely. Failure to comply with

local laws is not recommended

and can have a significant im-

pact on your legal liabilities

should any personal or property

damage result.

Page 65: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 65/201

Tools

The tools required to build a dark-

room are common ones that you

may already own. If you had to buy

all of the best available tools, the

total expenditure would be less than

$300, which is reasonable consider-ing how much you would have to pay

to have the room built for you. If you

are converting an existing room and

plan on adding only wiring or

plumbing, the cost will be even less.

Take it from someone who has

learned the hard way: buy only the

best tools. With reasonable care they

will last a lifetime, whereas cheap

tools probably won't last through

the first job. T he tools shown on

these pages are the standard ones re-

quired to do carpentry, plumbing,

and electrical work.

Tools are generally classed as

hand tools (powered only by the

human hand), power hand tools

(operated by hand but powered by a

motor), and power tools (bench-

mounted and powered by a motor).

The tools demonstrated in this book

are from the first two categories;

large power tools are not necessary.

Hand Tools

Hand Saw. These come in two kinds:crosscut (used t o cut across the grain ofthe wood) or rip (used to cut along thegrain).

Level. These are used to determine if

something s level in either the vertical o rhorizontal directions. A curved fluid-filledtube with an air bubble in it indicateswhen the level (and whatever it happensto be held against) is level and, if not, whatdirection it is tilted.

Plumb Bob. Suspended on a string,these are used to determine a perfectvertical line. When installing framing,paneling, and so forth, they will ensurethat the verticals are accurate. Hammers. The best hammer for car-

pentry work is the curved claw modelthat enables you t o drive a nail and thenpull it out using the other end.

Pliers. Pliers can be used for holding,turning, bending, or crushing. The bestkind are slip-joint pliers that adjust t ohandle either larger or smaller pieces.

Combination Square. Combines thefunctions of a ruler, square, and level in oneunit. Ideal for general purpose work, and it s

small size makes it easy to work with.

Chalk Line. When the string is pulledout of the holder it is covered with chalkdust. If you hold both ends down and snapthe taut string, it will snap against thefloor or wall and leave a line of chalk. Thisis a simple way to lay out the floorplan onthe basement floor, or t o indicate wherepipes or counters are to be run along awall. You can also use a piece of string andchalk, snapping it against the floo r in thesame manner, which works just as well(although a bi t messier).

Tape Measure. You can buy severaldifferent types of rulers, including hefolding zig-zag ruler o r the tape rulershown here. Most types will suffke forgeneral construction work, but this one is

slightly more convenient, since it is smalland comes in lengths ranging rom 6' omany hundreds of feet.

54

Page 66: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 66/201

PowerTools

Tubing Bender. Used to bend coppertubing so that the walls do no t collapseand restrict the flow.

Adjustable Wrench. Rather than buy awhole set of open-end wrenches, buy oneof these. They come in various sizes, and

the one you select should be based on themaximum size of nut you expect to en-counter. Because the largest nut is mostlikely to be in the plumbing, a wrench forworking on plumbing ittings should havejaws that open at least I 112".

Flaring Tool. Used in flaring the ends of

copper tubing t o be used in plumbing andincoming water lines; simplifies the instal-lation and eliminates the need for using atorch and solder.

Pipe Wrench. Used

and unfasten hreaded

primarily t o fasten

steel pipe.

SabrelBayonet Saw. If you plan onbuying only one power tool, this shouldbe it. It is by far the most versatile too lavailable for cutting wood, plastics, andmetal. Many styles of blades are available,ranging rom fine wood scroll blades, toblades that cut cardboard, to blades thatcut sheet steel. The narrow blades allowyou to dr ill a starter hole in a wall andthen cut out an openingwithout using

additional tools.

Hacksaw. This too l is very handy forcutting copper or plastic plumbing pipe. It

can also be used to cut cast-iron pipe orventilating duct.

Drill. The power dril l is usually a stan-dard tool in the home workshop. It s basicfunction is to dril l holes, but special at-tachments can be added to grind, polish,and sand. Slightly more expensive modelshave reversing motors and variable speedcontrols, which are especially useful be-cause they allow you t o start a hole with a

low speed thus giving you more control.For darkroom building, a hand brace andbit wil l suffice if you don't already have apower drill.

Tubing Cutter. Designed o make even,smooth cuts in copper pipe or tubing.Phkes working with Pipe easy. As the toolis revolved around the tube, the bladegradually cuts deeper and deeper unt il thepiece you want drops off.

Chain Wench. Used to twist largedrain, waste, or vent pipes in sewersystems.

Screwdrivers. These come in twotypes, slot-headed and Phillips, for twodifferent kinds of screw heads. They areeasy to te ll apart: the Phillips screw hascrossed slots, and the other has a singlestraight slot running across the screwhead YOU should have a variety of sizes ofscrewdrivers. The head should fit snuglyinto the slot of the screw or you willdamage the screw, making it difficult toremove.

Propane Torch. Ifyou choose to us e

soldered joints in Your Plumbing system,you will need a torch t o solder the

joints. investment.

Sander. The power sander can save youhours of work and is certainly a good

55

Page 67: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 67/201

InstalI ng Partitions

Building the Room Itself

If you are planning to install the

darkroom in a large space, such as a

basement or garage, the first step is

usually to partition the darkroomoff. If this is not done, it will be

much more difficult to control both

the cleanliness and the light-tight-

ness of the space. It is relatively easy

to make partitions; building door

frames and hanging doors can be

greatly simplified by buying set-up

units.

There are two kinds of partitions,

load-bearing and nonbearing. If you

have to move an existing partition to

accommodate the new ones for your

darkroom, you should know whichkind it is. A load-bearing wall sup-

ports part of the weight of the

house, and its removal can cause se-

rious problems in upstairs floors and

ceilings, A nonbearing wall can be

removed without replacing the s u p

port, as you would have to do with a

bearing wall; however, even non-

bearing walls may contain pipes or

electrical wiring that must be

rerouted. Study the wall carefully be-

Door and Header Details

fore deciding to move it. Wiring is

fairly easy to reroute; plumbing is

much more difficult. The detailed

plans in this section deal with only

the installation of new partitions

that are nonbearing.Wall partitions can be built with

either 2 x 4 studs or 2 x 3s . The 2 x 4s

are no t significantly more expensive

and do make a more stable wall, es-

pecially if cabinets and sinks will be

mounted to it.

Always be sure to use well-sea-

soned lumber. If you use inexpen-

sive green or wet lumber it will tend

to twist and bend as it dries within

the wall. This will crack the wall

board and also make door frames

and enlarger mounts move out of

alignment. Specify “dry” lumber

when ordering. For economy, always

use the lowest grade of lumber suit-

able for your project. For wall studs,

this would be “construction,” “stan-

dard,” or “utility”grades if your par-

titions are nonbearing, and “stud”

grade if they are either load-bearing

or nonbearing.

When preparing plans, remem-

FULL-LENGTHSTUD

f- IO€R THAN FRAME4FOR R?€-HUNG DOOR

TRIMMER STUD

ul

‘SOLE PLATE

fAlL OFH€AlD.FR

ber that the measurements of lum-

ber refer to the lumber before final

cutting by the lumber yard. There-

fore, a 2 x 4 s actually 1 1 /2 x 3 1/2,

and a 2 x 6 is actually 1 1 /2 x 5 1/2.

Marking the Layout on

the Floor

The first step in building the room is

to mark the floor to show where the

various walls and doors are to be

placed. Using a chalk line, transfer

the measurements from your layout

to the floor. To make long straight

lines with the chalk line, either drive

nails at both ends so that the string

can be stretched between them, orask two friends to hold the ends

down. With the string held tautly

against the floor, lift it an inch or so

straight up by grasping it in the mid-

dle of the run and let it snap back

against the floor. A faint chalk line

shows where the wall should be in-

stalled. You can measure off door

openings against this line and indi-

cate the markings on the floor.

Marking a Chalk Line

56

Page 68: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 68/201

Partition Parts

0 0 /CAPPLATE)

/ f l 7 /TOPPLATE)

Iu6 fSpAC€RSl

3 STUDS)

2 /SOLE PLATE)-1 1i-n

issembled Partition

5 HEADER) 66PACERSl

Partition Assembly. This two-partdrawing shows a typical partition inboth i t s assembled and unassembledstate. If you are planning to build a light-trap, the construction would be identi-cal, except the door and door framewould not be used. Instead, additionalpartitions would be built in the patternselected for the light trap.

Begin the cutting and assembling bymeasuringoff the sole plate (#2), cut-ting it t o allow for a door opening if oneis to be in that partition. The openingshould be the width of the door frame,plus an additional 3/4" clearance neededfor making adjustments when the frameis mounted into the wall.

Next cut the studs (#3) so thatthere are enough to be spaced every16" along the sole plate. Cut a top plate

(#7) o the same length as the sole plate(including the door opening).

Cut trimmer studs (#4) used tosupport the header over the doorframe opening. These should be cutlong enough to go from the top of thesole plate to 3/4'bove the door frame.

No w cut two pieces of 2 x 6 (#5) foruse as the header. Since they wil l beturned sideways to the other studs,their width will be too narrow unlessspacing (#6) i s used. If the wall i s beingconstructed of 2 x 4s, an ideal "spacer"would be a piece of 112" plywood cut tosize. Two pieces of 2 x 4 used sidewayswith a piece of this spacer in betweenequals the width of the 2 x 4 studs it

will come in contact with. If your wall is

being built of 2 x 6s to accommodate asliding door, the header should be con-

JoiningPartitions

PARTITION INTERSECfIM

WALL

pARTITION CORNER

structed of tw o pieces of 2 x 4 withspacers cut from another piece of 2 x 4so that they are 2 114" wide.

After you cut and lay out all of thepieces on the floor, you can begin as-sembling the wall. Start by connectingthe top and sole plates at either end tothe full-length studs. N ow put the door

frame in place and nail in the trimmersand full-length studs, remembering toleave 3/4" clearance on top and sides.No w nail the header into place over thetrimmers. Install the remaining studs,raise into place, and nail into the adjoin-ing wall. Assemble the second and thirdwalls in the same manner. Once theyare raised into place, al l of the wallsshould be connected with a cap plate(#8) as detailed in the figure.

57

Page 69: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 69/201

Hanging Doors

Installing Prehung

Door Frame

When the walls have been raised

into position and plumbed to ensure

they are vertical, the door frame canbe installed. Prehung (set-up) doors

are available from most lumber

yards, and since the door is already

mounted to a frame, you do not

have to install hinges, handles, lock

sets, and so on. I t is by far the easiest

unit to use.

The first step is to cut five blocks

half the width of the clearance left

when the rough frame was assem-

bled (3/8"). Nail one block to the

top and one to the bottom of the

rough opening on the side where

the hinges are to be placed. Using a

level, make sure they are exactly ver-

tical. If they are not , you will have to

plane the top or bottom one to

make them so. Now install two

blocks at the exact height of the

door hinges to provide them with

support, and place the remaining

block halfivay between them. Using

the plumb bob, make sure that they

are in line with the first two installed.

Install the door frame and nail it

to these blocks using 3" nails. Once

the hinge side of the door is nailed

into place, the door can be closed

and the other side of the frame

shimmed into place, using old shin-

gles that are wedge-shaped between

the door frame and trimmer stud.

Lightly tap them into place so the

frame comes within 1/8" to 1/4' of

the door itself. Be sure not to use too

much pressure when inserting the

shingles; that can cause the door

frame to bow out, making the doorstick. Use a level to ensure that the

door frame is level on all sides. Open

and close the door to make sure it is

properly installed.

After the wall board has been in-

stalled, the door frame and the gap

between it and the trimmer studs

can be covered by casing, as shown

in the figure.

58

Door Frame in Place

-

I INSTALL TDPiND eorrmt

BLOCKS. USEPLum BOBro ENSURE

TnErAREVERT/CAL.

HEADER

INSTALL H/NGEBLOCKS AND ONE P /TH DOOR CLOSED USE

PIECES O f WEDGE-SHAP€DSHMGLE TO SHIM HANDLE

NAIL FRAME- AND SHIMSIffTO PL A M

LCasingI

Page 70: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 70/201

Sliding Door

Installing Backing

Pocket Sliding Door. If you are goingto install a sliding door, the construc-tion details are slightly different fromthose of a regular hung door. The wallmust be thick enough to accommodatethe door and it s track within the parti-tion itself, and there must be a space

left in the door frame for the door t oenter the partition when it is opened.The figure shows how the track andwall should be constructed. All stepsare the same as for the regular wall,except the header is twice the width ofthe door and the space between the 2 x

2 sole plates must be wide enough toaccommodate the door track. The doorand track should be bought beforeassembling the wall, because trackwidths vary and you should be sure theopening you leave is wide enough.

sary to bring the 2 x 2 sole platesacross the opening, which can create ahazard when entering or leaving theroom. This hazard can be eliminated bycutting two wedge-shaped sills to beplaced on either side of the sole plate.

In light-proofing the door, it i s neces-

Backing. In some places, you will needsupport f or heavy objects such as sinks,enlarger mounts, cabinets, and phones.Special reinforcement, called backing,should be installed at these locations.Use 2" x 10" board and notch the studsto accommodate it. The backing shouldbe securely nailed to the studs and canspan any distance, ranging rom thedistance between tw o studs to an entirelength of wall. I t s location should be

indicated on your elevations, because itwill be covered by wall board beforethe sinks and other pieces of equipmentar e attached to it. If you don't remem-ber where the backing s, you couldhave a problem locating it.

59

Page 71: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 71/201

Installing Sheetrock@

Finishing and Painting

This step takes place after the

plumbing and wiring have been in-

stalled. It is the final step in finishing

the room a nd helps to make it moreattractive and easy to keep clean.

The materials used help to deter-

mine the quietness of the room, the

ability to maintain a stable tempera-

ture inside it, and its degree of light-

proofness and light-reflecting quali-

ties.

Most rooms today are finished in

drywall, which is a gypsum board

consisting of a noncombustible core

with a paper surface on front, back,

and edges. It is easy to cut and in-

stall. Panels come in standard 4'widths, and if you put your studs on

16" centers, one panel will cover

four studs, from the middle of the

first stud to the fourth. Some boards

have beveled edges where sheets

meet each other, allowing for easy

filling of the cracks. If your panels

have these bevels, they should be fac-

ing out. It is recommended that you

use panels of either 1/2" or 5/8"

thickness. The floor-to-ceiling height

should be measured and the panels

cut to fit and installed with nails

made specifically for wallboard in-

stallation.

I . Scoring. Place panel with ivory-col-ored side face up. Measure and markpanel size at opposite edges of panel. Lineup straightedge with the marks. Holdstraightedge irmly against the panel whilescoring down through paper and part o fpanel core. Hold knife at slight angle awayfrom straightedge o prevent cutting intostraightedge.

2. Cutting. Break core of Sheetrockpanel by snapping away from the scoredface paper. Complete cutting by runningknife through back paper.

3. Sanding Edges. Smooth all cut edgesof panels with coarse sandpaper wrappedaround a hand-size block of wood. Keeppanel edges as square as possible.

4. Nail Attachment. For 114, 318, andI 2" thick panels use I I 4" GWB-54annular-ring nails. For 5 / 8 panels, use I318" annular-ring nails. Space nails a maxi-mum of 7"apart on ceilings, 8 on walls,and at least 3/ 8 from ends and edges of

panels. Hold panel tight against framingand nail center of panel first, perimeterlast. Leave a small dimple at the nailheadfor filling with joint compound. Do notoverdrive o r countersink nails. This re-sults in breaking the face paper o r fractur-ing the core o f the panel.

5. Ceilings. Apply ceilings first, with twopeople handling panels if possible. If you'redoing the job alone, make simple T-bracesconsisting of 2' lengths of I x 4s nailed to2 x 4 uprights that are I /2" longer thanthe floor-to-ceiling height. Wedge T-braces between the f loor and panel tosupport panel while nailing and assure firm

Courtesy United States Gypsum Company contact with joists.

6. Walls. Carefully measure the loca-tions and sizes of all openings in panels forfixtures. Cut with a keyhole saw. Fixtureplates must cover cutouts completely. Forhorizontal application, apply the top panelf irst, tight against the ceiling panels. Stag-ger end-joints in adjacent rows. Use verti-cal application when ceiling height s over8' 2", or if this results in fewer joints andless waste. Cut panels accurately so thatthey do not have to be forced in to place.

60

Page 72: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 72/201

Page 73: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 73/201

Getting to KnowYour Plumbing

Nothing is quite so intimidating to

the prospective darkroom builder as

the thought of installing new pl um b

ing. There is something awesome

about cutting into the pipes of one’s

home when you are no t totally confi-dent that the job can actually be suc-

cessfully completed. It is this fear of

the unknown that makes plumbing a

forbidding prospect. This fear can

be overcome so you don’t have to

give up in advance and pay a

plumber to d o the entire job. Per-

haps the jo b requ ired is relatively

simple and requires no major work

at all. If not, you can study the basic

theory of plumbing. This section will

be a good start, but o ther references

should be searched out in the local

library, especially if your home is

plumbed in materials not covered in

this book.

You should tackle difficult jobs

only if the water system can be shut

off for a day or so in case something

serious does happen and you cannot

get professional help to correct i t or

complete the jo b yourself. Th e rec-

ommended method is to find a

plumber who will do the planning

and guide you through the intrica-

cies of the jo b, but allow you to d o all

of the routine work. This results in a

lower cost to you, and it also ensures

that the jo b will meet the local build-

ing codes a nd pass inspection. Also,

if something does go wrong, there is

someone to call on for help. There

are four major steps involved in in-

stalling a plumbing system:

1. Locate and identify the exist-

ing plumbing and select a point at

which the new system can tap intothe old.

2. Draw plans for how the lines

will run and where the connections

will be made to the hot and cold sup-

ply lines, the drain, and the vent sys-

tem.

3. Measure the runs and draw up

the specifications for the materials

needed, including pipe or tubing,

fittings, pipe hangers or supports,

and tools.

4. Install the system and check itout to see that it works properly. In-

vite the building inspector from

your local office over to inspect it

and give it a passing or failing grade.

It usually helps to have touched base

with the building inspector first.

You’d be surprised at the kind of

free advice you can receive before

the jo b is begun.

How to Locate a Place to

Tap into the System

When deciding where to put a dark-

room in a house or apartment, you

must consider the ready availability

of hot and cold water and access to a

drainage system. Before making the

final decision on the darkroom

placement, you should find the pos-

sible points to tie into the plumbing

system.

Plumbing will be either exposed

or concealed. If it is exposed, you

should have no problem identifyingthe various elements by tracing the

supply lines from the meter and the

drain lines from the sewer connec-

tion. If the plumbing is concealed,

however, as it will be in most houses

and apartments, you will have to in-

volve yourself in some sleuthing.

Here are clues that you should look

for:

1. In bathrooms, kitchens, or

utility rooms, the plumbing will usu-

ally be exposed under a sink. That

will make a natural tie-in point for

both the supply and the drain, and

connecting at this point will elimi-

nate any worries about having to in-

stall a venting system since one al-

ready exists for the sink.

2. If you are converting a spare

room, the wall it shares with either a

kitchen or bathroom (provided that

the wall in the other room has the

sink or toilet against it) is the one

most likely to have plumbing. If youhave to break through a wall to find

the plumbing, first remove any

molding and see if the plumbing can

be located through the exposed

opening. Otherwise, careful mea-

surements in one room can be trans-

ferred into the other to give an accu-

rate location. It is also sometimes

possible to hear the water in the

pipes, especially if someone turns

the water on a nd off in a nearby sink

while you listen.

3. If you are converting a spare

room that is either over or under an

existing system, it is relatively easy to

tap into i t vertically by running pipes

between the wall studs. This will

allow you at least to utilize the exist-

ing drain and venting system.

4. f you are converting an attic,

garage, or loft, there may be no ex-

isting plumbing readily available

and a major installation could be re-

quired.

62

Page 74: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 74/201

Typical Plumbing System

Typical Plumbing System. The plumbing system in a typi-cal home or apartment will look something like the figureshown here. It is composed of three main subsystems:

Supply. Both the cold water (coming directly from themeter) and the hot water (coming from the meter throughthe hot-water heater) that feed the faucets throughout thehouse.

Drain. The system that removes the waste water from thehome. Since this system is not under pressure, all drain pipesmust be sloped toward their eventual outlet.

Vent. This system equalizes the pressure in the drain systemso that a quick rush of water does not create a vacuum thatwill empty the traps and allow gases from the city sewer linesor septic systems to enter the home.

63

Page 75: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 75/201

Page 76: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 76/201

Page 77: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 77/201

Typical Darkroom Plumbing

The typical darkroom plumbing re-

quirements are relatively simple.

This section shows most of the ele-

ments that will be en cou nte red in

the existing system and illustrates

most of the materials needed for thenew plumbing. It is an idealized

plan, but by using it as a guide, you

should be able to design and specify

the materials you need for your own

system.

Shopping i s t for PlumbingInstallation.

This general plan for darkroom plumb-ing illustrates and identifies al l of theparts required. The numbers are keyedto the shopping i s t and to the photo-

graphs on the opposite page.

Shopping List

General Plumbing-Supply7. Copper pipe (rigid)

7. Copper tubing (flexible)

11. Saddle T adaptors

11. T adaptors

17. 90" elbows

12 . Hose bibs

11. Reducing Ts Caps

18. Adaptors to existing pipes

14. Couplings

Faucets i f not usingjlt ers and

temperature regulators

8. Long-necked swivel mixing

faucet

Spray hose attachment

Plumbers putty

Materials needed to build modularp l u m b

ing unit with both iltration and tmpe ra-

ture regulatio n (described on pages 76-77)

5. Hot line filter

5. Cold line filter9. Temperature regulator

17. Elbows

11. Ts

7. Pipe

9. Faucet

8. Long-necked swivel mixing faucet

13. Hose

6. Hose connection

Drain

3. Plastic drain pipe

4. Adaptor

19. Elbows

2. Trap

1. Sink strainer/drain

(for unregulated outlet)

13 HIGH PRESSURE WASHING MACHINEHOSEI SINU mAlN UNIT 7 COWERPIPE

2 P- TRAP fPVC/ 8 UNREGULAZD WAER MIXING VALVE 19 COUPLINGS

3 PVC PIPE 9 TEMPERATURE REGULATED WATER MIXING VALVE 15 PVC CDUPLlffGs

9 ADAPTOR TO SOILSTACK I 0 EXISTING SUPPLY LINES fHOT AND COLD)

5 WATER FILTERS

6 HOSE CONNECTIONS

16 ffPE HANGERS

I1 Tb To A D A P T W OLD SE7F.M TONEW I7 ELBOWS

I2 HOSE Bl8 WITH SHUTOm VALVE 18 ADAPTOR FROM WREADEDP I E

19 PVC E mow

66

Page 78: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 78/20167

Page 79: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 79/201

Roughing in the Plumbing

Installation

If you have to do major work to in-

stall the system, begin by roughing

in the plumbing. Plumbing is in-

stalled in new construction after theroom has been framed but before

the finishing wallboard has been pu t

up. If you are not doing new con-

struction, the plumbing can be hid-

den behind cabinets, covered by a

false wall, or left exposed-although

that can become a dust collector.

If you are installing the plumbing

in a newly framed (or exposed) wall,

you should consider recessing the

pipes into either the studs (the 2 x 4s

holding up the walls) or the joists

(the beams holding up the ceiling).When doing this, there are a few

things to remember:

1. All holes in joists should be

centered in the vertical direction,

and the hole diameters should be no

greater than one-quarter of the

depth of the joist.

2. A notch can be cu t in a joist as

long as it does not fall in the middle

and is as close to a support as possi-

ble. The notch should be no more

than one-sixth the depth of the joist

and should be reinforced with 2 x 4s

nailed under it (if it's on top of the

joist), or reinforced with a steel

brace if the notch is on the bottom.

3. When notching studs, a notch

cut into the top half should be no

deeper than two-thirds of the stud's

depth, but on the bottom no deeper

than one-third. The notch should

then be reinforced with a reinforc-

ing plate.

Adapting off the Main

Supply Lines

The next step after roughing in the

plumbing is to make the connection

between the new system and existingpipes. This is normally done with

adaptors that serve three functions.

The first is to provide an outlet from

the existing pipe; by inserting a T-fit-

ting into an existing pipe run, you

add a new outlet to which your su p

ply lines can be attached. The sec-

ond function is to marry together

pipes of different materials. Special

Ts exist to connect copper pipe to

copper, galvanized, or plastic supply

pipe. The third function is to reduce

the main line pipe size to the size

pipe you plan on using. If you are

connecting 3 / 8 ' copper tubing to a

3/8" copper supply line, all you re-

quire is a 3/8" T. However, you may

require a T that will reduce a 1"sup-

ply in galvanized steel to a 3/8" cop-

per pipe connected to your sink. See

the description of a saddle T on

page 66 before committing yourself

to any more complex method of tap-

ping your existing system. Although

the illustration shows it being con-

nected to a hose bib so that the sink

can be connected through rubber

hoses, saddle Ts can be used to con-

nect galvanized pipe to copper and

so on. It is a time-saving device that

eliminates having to cut and thread

steel pipe.

68

Page 80: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 80/201

How to Sup port the Pipes

2" x 6" d .^C^. .-C I

pJGGUPPORT

How to Support the Pipes. All pipes

should be supported w ith brackets or

hangers at regular intervals. W it h plastic

pipe o r long runs of copper, leave the

hangers loose enough to al low fo r ex-

pansion and con tractio n o f the pipes.

How to Make a Not ch Cross Pieces

How to Make a Notch. Using a

crosscut saw, make two parallel cuts

into the stud or joist as far apart as the

pipe to be inserted is wide. Cu t them t o

the necessary depth, and then, using a

wo od chisel, knock o ut the piece of

woo d between the cuts.Cross Pieces. In tho se cases wher e

the plumbing is running parallel to th e

existing supports, cross pieces can be

inserted against which th e plumbing canbe attached. Be sure the plumbing is

recessed sufficiently so that the pipes

are hidden, but the f ixtures wi l l pro -

trude th e co rrec t distance after the

finish wallboard o r paneling has been

installed.

69

Page 81: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 81/201

Installing Supply Lines

The advantages of using copper for

supply lines are its quality, its ease of

installation, and its ability to meet

most codes.

Measuring Pipe

and Tubing

How to Determine the Diameter Needed.

Most of the plumbing you install for

the darkroom will be 3/8" or 1/2" in

diameter on the supply side and 1 !4"

or 2" on the drain side. It is impor-

tant to determine the size of the ex-

isting system into which you will tap

to know what size adaptors to buy.

The outside diameter is not a com-

pletely accurate guide, because thediameter in which pipe is sold is de-

termined by the size of the hole run-

ning through it. The pipe you nor-

mally encounter in the wall has all its

holes covered (otherwise it leaks),

soyou have to make a determination

based on the kind of material and

the outside circumference. The

table below will give a good indica-

tion of the size of the existing pipe.

Run a string around the pipe and

mark where i t crosses. The distance

between the two points is the cir-

cumference of the pipe.

Ifthe length of

thestring is: 2% " 3%" 3%''4, 4% " 5"

The size of the pipe is:

and the @fie is

galvanized: %" 1" 1% "

arc*eK: %" 1" 1%"

Measuring the Length

of Pipe Needed

When measuring the length of pipe

required, take into account the fit-

tings into which the pipe is eventu-

ally going to be inserted. The easiest

way to do this is first to measure the

distance from the end of the fitting

to where the pipe will be stopped

when inserted. Now place the fit-

tings exactly where they will be in-

stalled in the system and measure

the distance from one face of the fit-

ting (the end ) to the other. Add this

measurement to the distance deter-mined above (add it twice, for there

are usually two fittings, one at each

end) for the total length of pipe re-

quired.

Measuring Pipe

If you plan to work with threaded

pipe, you can use the following table

to indicate how far you can expect

the threaded pipe to go into the fit-

ting. Again, remember that there

will be two fittings, so the distance

that t he pipe goes into the fitting

should be doubled before adding it

to the face-to-face measurement.

Distance Threaded Pipe Extends

into a Fitting

Size qf pipe Distance into,fitting

1/2" 1 / 2

3/4' 1 / 21" 9/16"

1-1/4" 5 / 81-1/2" 5 / 8 "

2" 1-1/16"

Working with

Copper Pipe

Cutting. There are two ways to cut

copper pipe. The first is to use a

hacksaw to make the cut and a file tosmooth off the burrs. An easier

method is to use a tube-cutter, en-

suring a square and smooth cut in

the pipe or tubing.

Connecting Copper Pipe or Tube to Its

Fittings. There are four types of con-

nections that can be made with cop-

per tubing or pipe: soldered (used

for either rigid or flexible pipe);

threaded (rigid only); flared (flexi-

ble only); and compression (flexible

only). Compression fittings are theeasiest to use and require no tools

other than a pair of wrenches.

Using a Mitre Box

Wh en cut ting wi th a hacksaw, it helps

to use a mi t re box to ensure a square

cut in the pipe.

FilingOff Burrs

After cutting the pipe, be sure to file off

the bu rrs left by the saw blade.

70

Page 82: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 82/201

Page 83: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 83/201

Installing the Drain

If your building code permits the

use of PVC plastic pipe for drains,

you are in good shape. To install this

material you basically nee d only a

saw and some glue. Additional tools

may be required where you tie intothe existing system. The installation

of a drain pipe encompasses three

steps:

1. Installing the drain outlet in the

2. Connecting a trap to the sink.

3. Running the drain pipe an d con-

necting it to the existing DW V(drain-waste-vent) system.

sink.

Drain Assembly

Drain Assembly. Buy a sink outletunit that matches the drain pipe youintend to install (usually I 1/2").Drill a

hole in the bottom of the sink at i t s

lowest point, and install the unit follow-ing the instructions that came with it.

Or use the illustration above as a guide.

Fitting Drain in a Wooden Sink

Fitting Drain in a Wooden Sink. If

your sink drain i s being installed in a

wooden sink, you should f i rs t drill orsaw the hole to hold the unit. The nexIstep i s to recess the flange that keepsthe drain from falling through the hole.If it is not recessed, water will build up

in the sink to the top of the flange. Thebest way to do this is to insert the unit

in the drain, draw a circle around theouter part o f the flange, and remove theunit. At this point, carefully cut the

circle out t o the depth of the flange. Ifthe sink bottom is made of plywood,one of the levels of laminate will beapproximately the same height as theflange. After the circle is cut, use theknife to separate the top layer of ply-wood and remove it.

Assembling the Trap

Assembling the Trap. Install a P-trapconsistingof three parts (usually avail-able as a unit): ( I ) a tai l piece comingfrom the sink drain; (2 ) a J-bend; and(3) a trap arm.

Installing the Run to Existing

Drain Pipe

Installing the Run to Existing Drain

Pipe. The P-trap should now be con-nected to the existing drain system. Al ldrain pipe must slope toward it s outleta t the rate of I 4" per linear foot. Todetermine this, measure the height ofthe bottom of the trap outlet you haveinstalled and the horizontal distancebetween it and the pipe t o which youwill connect the drain. Multiply the 114drop times the number of horizontalfeet and that will tell you how far todrop the pipe over the entire run. Sub-

t r ac t that number from the distancebetween the bottom o f the trap outletand the floor; this determines how farup the existing drain you should makeyour connection. Most building codesrequire, and common sense dictates,that no part of the drain pipe can bebelow the top part of the U-bend in thetrap. This is to prevent the pipe fromacting as a siphon and emptying thetrap, which would allow sewer gas toenter the darkroom. This requirement,when related to the need for the pipeto drop I 4" for each foot that it runs,

means that a sink outlet can be nofarther than 4 114' from the stack if thedrain pipe you are using is I 1/4" indiameter, or 5' if the pipe is 3". Thismeasurement can influence the locationof the darkroom, as well as the sink andthe sink's drain. Everything should bedone to ensure that the outlet meetsthese requirements, because installing anew D WV stack can be very expensive.

72

Page 84: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 84/201

Page 85: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 85/201

The EasyWay Out and Unique Solutions

A Unique Solution

If you are lucky, your entire plumb-

ing connection can be made be-

tween the sink assembly and the ex-

isting water supply in a matter ofminutes. All you need is a “saddleT.”

You can bolt this device onto the ex-

isting pipe and then drill through to

tap the water line (the water should

be turned off and the drill

gro und ed) . Screw a hose bib int o

the saddle-T fitting and connect the

sink to the water supply with the

high-pressure water hose used for

washing machines. Either tap the

drain into the existing drain, or ru n

a rubber hose from the sink drain

into the existing sink, bath, orshower to provide drainage.

Saddle-T Assembly

Making Flared Joints

Shower Diverter. If you build yourdarkroom in a bathroom, you can pur-chase a shower diverter that allows youto use the shower and, at the sametime, provide a convenient connectionfor a hose that can run to the print

washer or t o the sink. The diverter is

easy to install; remove the shower head,screw on the diverter, replace theshower head, and connect the dark-room hose. These diverters by Alsonsar e available in most hardware stores.

Making Flared Joints. Fi t thethreaded portion of the fitting onto thetube before beginning the flaring opera-tion. Then slide on the metal gasket.

Insert the tube into the flaring blockso i t s end protrudes just slightly. Screwthe tapered head of the flaring tool into

the tube, makingit

flare into a funnelshape.Screw the male-threaded fitting into

the fitting that was f i rs t put on the tube.Tighten it down with reasonable pres-sure.

Making Compression Joints

Making Compression Joints. Slipthe female fitting over the tube, fol-lowed by the metal gasket.

Insert the male fitting and, usingwrenches, tighten the joint.

‘4

Page 86: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 86/201

Draining Uphill

You may find that your darkroom

does not have a drain to connect

with that is lower than the sink outlet

you plan to install. To get the waste

water out of the sink and up to the

drain, you will have to install a

pumping system. First, determine

the rate of flow of your pump. Your

plumbing store or plumber can helpyou with this. Usually, installation in-

structions will be included with the

pump. If they are not, you can follow

the basic instructions covered in the

section "Installing the Drain" above.

Pfefer Phittings.

The Pfefer Company distributes a com-plete line of plumbing connecters fordarkroom use. The ones shown beloware typical of the wide range available.

Y-Adaptor. Designed to give two

outlets from one water source, eachwith separate shut-off valve. Al l fittingsconnect with garden-hose threads.

Swivel Hose Connecter. Has femalegarden hose swivel. Models are available

to connect to 1/4", 3 1 8 , and 1/2" ID

(inner diameter) tubing.

Thermometer Well. Can be in-serted in line to hold thermometer in

water flow. Allows constant monitoringof the incoming water temperature.

Barbed Hose Connecter. Designedfor use when connecting a hose to anytank or tray. Models are available toconnect to I 4",3/8",and 112" ID hoseor tubing.

Pumping water uphill to an existingdrain line was the least expensive solu-tion when Rick Ashley installed hisdarkroom in the basement of an older

Marblehead, Mass. home. The unitconsists of a holding tank with floatvalve, a pump, and a check valve. Thewater from the sink flows into the tank,and its level is measured by the float,which automatically turns the pump onand off as needed. The check valveprevents water from flowing backwardin the system.

Adaptor. Models are available toconnect garden hose to 1/2" or 3/4"

male pipe threads.

Snap Coupler. With all hoses andfittings connected with snap couplers,lines can be changed around quickly with-out having to unscrew threaded fittings.Makes connections quick and easy.

Clamp-on Hose Adaptor. Connectsgarden hose to threadless faucets. Simi-tar model has snap fitting t o connect t osnap nipple.

Drain Alignment Mistakes. Installinga drain can be like digging a tunnel fromtwo sides of a mountain: if they don'tmeet in the middle, they don't do muchgood. Ifyou find that your drain and sinkdon't meet where you had planned, thisflexible connecter by Webstone can beused to cover this mistake.

75

Page 87: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 87/201

A Modular Plumbing System

The Components

This modular unit consists of a tem-perature-regulating valve by Mey-

nall, two in-line water filters by

Arkay, an d an unregula ted mixing

valve.

Laying Out the Units. Cut a plywood

panel ( 5 / 8 " or 3/4") the length of

your sink and at least 2' high. Assem-

ble the basic components on the

boards in the rough positions they

will occupy.

Filters have an input and an out-

put side, so align them as indi-

cated in the directions that come

with them.

Determine the correct mount for

the unregulated outlet. Since

most faucets are designed to be

connected from either the rear of

0

0

0

the unit or from the bottom, your

mount may vary somewhat from

the one illustrated. If possible, use

the type that is plumbed from the

bottom and cut a 2"-thick piece of

wood large enough to hold it. This

can later be mounted to the ply-

wood panel with long bolts.

Mount the regulator valve on the

back panel.

Using a black pencil, draw lines

connecting the cold water lines

from the outlet side of the filter to

both the regulated and unregu-

lated valves. Make sure that theyare fed on the correct side. Both

units will be marked as to which

side is hot and which is cold.

Using a red pencil, trace the hot

water supply lines from the outlet

on the hot water filter to the regu-

lated a nd unregulated valves.

Assembling the Unit. The unit should

be assembled using 1 / 2 " copper

pipe with soldered oints.

Determine the exact fittings re-

quired for the assembly. Each

right-angle turn will require an

elbow; each fitting will require a

matching fitting that fits into or

on it; each connection from the

main line to a branching line will

require a T.

With this list of components in

hand, visit your local plumbing

supply store. A plumbing supply

store will probably be more usefulthan a hardware store: the line of

parts is usually larger, and the peo-

ple are more knowledgeable

about your needs.

If you are unsure about fittings for

certain parts, take the parts with

76

Page 88: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 88/201

The plumbing system shown here is

mounted on a large panel over the

darkroom sink. It is connected to the

house plumbing supply with high-pres-

sure rubber washing-machine hoses.

This modular design allows the sink and

plumbing system t o be moved into a

new darkroom. You can assemble the

unit at a workbench , which is usually

easier than assembling a unit pe rma-

nently on the wall.

you so that the salesperson can de-

termine the right fittings.

Begin the assembly by laying the

fittings on the board in the places

indicated by the sketch you drew

earlier while doing the layout.

Measure the lengths of pipe

needed to connect these fittings.

Be sure to include the portion of

the pipe that will fit into the fit-

ting.

Cut the lengths of pipe needed,

and assemble the en tire unit to be

sure that everything lines up and

fits correctly.Remove the copper pipe and fit-

ting and solder all of the joints.

Where fittings are to be set at vari-

ous angles, be sure to mark the

proper alignment (scratch the

pipe and fitting with a knife) so

that they can be reassembled in

the correct alignment.

Reassemble the soldered units on

the panel and connect the fittings

to the filters, and the faucets with

the threaded fittings. Be sure that

all threaded fittings are tightened

securely and sealed with pipe-joint

cement.

Connect the unit to its supply by

attaching the high-pressure wash-

ing machine hoses (regular hose

will break and flood your dark-

room). They can be connected to

the existing supply lines with asaddle-T adaptor.

Turn on the water and check for

leaks.

77

Page 89: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 89/201

In roduc t on to EIe c tric ity

If plumbing is in timidating to the av-

erage person, electrical wiring can

be downright terrifjmg. Very few

photographers have drowned while

installing plumbing, but you can bet

there have been a few shocks forthose installing their own wiring.

Electricity can be fatal, and this is es-

pecially true in a darkroom where

the presence of moisture con-

tributes to electrical conductivity.

Wiring should be attempted only by

knowledgeable people, and even

then it should be inspected by a li-

censed electrician to be sure there

are no hidden flaws. Wiring over

sinks, faulty grounding, or cables in

moisture-laden places all contribute

to serious problems. If you are not

experienced enough to take on this

job yourself and yet don’t want to

spend a great deal of money, find an

electrician who will do the heavy

wiring (service entrance wiring, fuse

panels, etc.) but will allow you to do

the installation of cable runs, light

switches, power outlets, and so forth,

and inspect the jo b upo n comple-

tion. This method will save money

but also guarantee tha t the job has

been done correctly.In this section it is assumed that

you are confronted with one of two

common situations.

Utilizing an E xisting Outlet. If your

darkroom has walls that have been

finished and you don’t want to get

involved in any heavy construction

work, you can build an electrical

control panel that plugs into an ex-

isting outlet. The only requirement

is that the circuit into which you are

plugging can carry the expected

load. To make these calculations use

the information in the next section,

“Electricity in the Darkroom.” This

method has several advantages. Pri-

marily, it requires no damage to the

existing room, so it can be recon-

verted to its original purpose with-

out any extensive work. It’s easier

and less expensive than redoing the

entire room wiring and is equally

functional and effective. The unit

can be constructed on a kitchen

table and, when you move, it can go

with you and be plugged into thenext darkroom. Instructions on how

to build this unit follow later in this

section.

Rewiring from the Service Entrance.

When you want a permanent instal-

lation, you can wire the darkroom

circuits from the service entrance

(fuse panel) to the darkroom outlets

and switches. Before beginning this

installation, you should check with

your local building department and

become familiar with the relevantcodes. Failure to follow the laws of

your community could make your

insurance policy invalid should in-

jury or fire occur as a result of a

faulty installation.

HowYour Electrical

Circuits Work

The electric current for your resi-

dence enters from the street

through heavyduty cables. The first

connection after they enter the

house is to a fuse panel. This panel

(called a service entrance) performs

two functions. The first function is to

take the incoming current and dis-

tribute it to a number of smaller cir-

cuits. This allows the house wiring

an d equipm ent to be of a smaller

size than it would be if all of the

house curren t went through o ne

large circuit. In this respect it’s like

an eight-lane expressway coming

into the panel with a large number

of one-lane exits leaving to various

parts of the house. The second func-

tion of the fuse panel is to prevent

the wiring from catching fire or

melting should it become over-

loaded. This is accomplished with

fuses or circuit breakers. When cur-

rent flows through a wire it gener-

ates heat. If there were n o fuses, and

you drew more current than the sys-

tem was rated for, the wires would

become hotter and hotter until they

or the surrounding material caughtfire. The fuses are made to break or

interrupt the circuit if current flow

ever exceeds the capacity of the cir-

cuit. Never try to increase the capac-

ity of a circuit by inserting pennies in

the fuse holder or by increasing the

rating of the fuse you install. Either

of these solutions creates fire and

safety hazards.

When wiring your darkroom it is

important to know what your cir-

cuits and fuses are rated at in amps

(the higher the rating the more cur-rent the line can carry) and what

outlets are currently on which cir-

cuits. You also need to know what

the darkroom load on your circuits

is expected to be, as well as the load

on other outlets that may already be

wired into the circuit you plan to

use. If you calculate that your dark-

room will require 12 amps and your

circuits are rated to carry 15 amps,

you can wire off an existing circuit-

provided other outlets already wired

into the circuit are using no more

than 3 amps. If they are using more,

or if your circuits are rated a t less

than you need, you will either have

to install an entirely new circuit or

split your darkroom load between

two existing circuits.

78

Page 90: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 90/201

Fuse Panel How to Tell Wh at Outlets Are onW h a t Circuits

[f you plan to ru n the wiring off of an existing circuit, you should first

hgure out what outlets and current demands are already on that circuit.

rhese other outlets and their loads must be taken into considerationNhen determining if the circuit can handle the load your darkroom will

add to it.

The wall outlets and the lighting fixtures in a home or apartment are

;enerally installed and wired before the final wall panels are installed.

rhis means that the initial wiring is located for reasons of convenience

and economics. All outlets in all rooms are usually not on the same cir-

cuit. So be sure to check the entire house when trying to decide what

mtlets are on which circuits.

1. Draw the fuse panel (or circuit breakers) showing their arrangement

in the box.

2. Turn off the master power switch or pull the master fuse. This will

kill all of the electricity in the house and make it safe to pull one ofthe circuit fuses. If your house is on circuit breakers, they are safe to

switch without turning off the master switch.

3. Remove one fuse or turn one circuit breaker off.

4. Turn the main power switch back on. This will restore all electrical

power, with the exception of the circuit from which you removed the

fuse or turned off the circuit breaker.

5. Using a voltage tester (see '"Tools and Materials for Electrical Work

below), or by plugging in a small lamp, check all of the outlets in the

house to see which ones don 't work. These are all on the circuit from

which you removed the fuse. Also check all light switches to see

which lights are on the circuit; don't forget to check such heavy

appliances as the refrigerator, washing machine, and so on. Any ap-

pliance outlet or switch on each circuit should be noted on yourdrawing.

6. Turn the master switch off; turn the circuit breaker back on o r re-

place the fuse. Take out another fuse and repeat the same process. If

working with a fuse panel, always turn off the main power before re-

moving or installing a fuse ust to be safe.

When you have completed this chart, you should know what is al-

ready on the circuit to which you want to make your connection. If any

heavy appliances such as washing machines or space heaters are on the

same circuit, you should change your plans because their load is guar-

anteed to be too high. It may also be againstyour building codes to con-

nect into those circuits. In any event, whatever is already on the circuit

should be used in making the power calculations in the next section.

79

Page 91: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 91/201

Page 92: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 92/201

Converting from

Watts to Amps

To convert from watts to amps, use

the formula:

AMPS = WATTS

VOLTS

If you live in the United States, di-

vide the results from Row E of the

previous table by 115 (the standard

American voltage) and you will

know how many amps are required.

In England or Europe, you would di-

vide by 220 for the same result.

You can also use th e following

table:

an d yo u live

in the US.r f rm, (115 volts)

are usang your circuit

wattage must be capable Europe

between of canying 220 volts

0-100

100-200

200-300

300-400

400-500

500-600

600-700

700-800

800-900

900-1000

1000-1 100

1100-1200

1200-13001300-1400

0.9 amps 0.5

2.6 amps 1.4

3.5 amps 1.8

4.4 amps 2.3

5.2 amps 2.7

6.1 amps 3.2

7.0 amps 3.6

8.0 amps 4.1

9.0 amps 4.6

10.0 amps 5.0

1.8 amps 0.9

10.5 amps 5.5

11.5 amps 5.912.5 amps 6.4

DoYou Have Enough

Amps in Your Circuit?

In most modern American homes,

the circuits are wired up to handle a

load of 15 amps. Older homes vary,

an d you should check carefully to

determine what their rated capacity

is. If your answer to the previous cal-culation is less than the rated capac-

ity of your house, you will have no

problem using the circuit you

planned. If your answer was more,

there are a few solutions:

Typical Darkroom Circuits

1 . Eliminate some of the equip-

ment.

2. Put some of the equipment on

a separate circuit. Use your drawing

to determine the closest convenient

one that is truly a separate circuit

and not just a different outlet on the

same circuit.

3. Do not use all of the equip-

ment at the same time. You can eas-

ily change your work habits so that

you are not drying prints when the

enlarger is on, or vice versa.

4. Add a new circuit coming from

the fuse panel rated at the capacity

you need.

Solutions NOT to use:

1. NEVER put pennies in fuse

boxes.

2. NEVER put higher-rated fuses

in the box. You cannot do this safely

without changing the wiring.

Placement of Electrical Circuits in

the Darkroom. This illustrationshows the typical arrangement of re -

quired electrical fixtures, outlets, andswitches. The drawing shows threeseparate circuits for white lights, safe-lights, and outlets. There is also a mas-

t e r switch controlling all power t o thedarkroom.

All switches should be located nearthe enlarger as a matter of conve-nience.

All safelights should be located atleast 4' from where light-sensitivematerials wil l be used, that is, theenlarger easel and processing rays.The switch controlling the white-lightcircuit should be separated from theother switches to prevent accidentallyturning the lights on when materialsare exposed.

mounted at least 3' above the floor toeliminate the hazard of walking onwires plugged into them.

All electrical outlets should be

81

Page 93: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 93/201

Tools and Materials for ElectricalWork

All of the materials needed to wire

darkroom circuits are available at

local hardware stores. Make a list of

all the parts you need before you go,

because once you are working on

electricity in the house, it will be dif-ficult to safely turn it back on until

the job is completed.

Tools

Voltage Tester (I). This device is

used to determine i f a circuit is live. Itwill light up if there is voltage in thecircuit. It is also used to determine whatoutlets are on which circuits and tomake sure that the circuit i s not livebefore working on it.

Pliers (2). These are used to twisttogether the ground wires, which areusually too heavy t o twist by hand.

Wi re Strippers (3). Wire can bestripped with a knife but wire strippersare better. The surface of the wireshould not be damaged when stripping;

such damage could cause a short circuit.

Equipment

Fuse Panel (4). A modern fuse panelwith circuit breakers wil l be locatednear the source of the incoming electri-cal lines.

Fuses (5 and 8). Fuses in older panelswill look like the illustrations shownhere. One screws into place, and theother snaps into holding clips.

Wa ll Switch (6). Used to control

power t o circuits and outlets in thedarkroom.

Outlets (7). Used to plug in darkroomequipment. Always buy the type thataccepts grounded plugs.

Switch with Pilot Light (9). Thisswitch can be used to control all outlets

in the darkroom. The light will indicateif the circuits are on or off.

Switch Outlet ( I0). You can usethese outlets in place of regular outletsif you want to be able to turn individualoutlets on o r off at the outlet itself.

Cable ( I I ). Most wiring today i s donewith what i s called NM (nonmetallic)cable, which replaces armor cable foundin older homes. Be sure to buy it withtw o wires and ground. Also be sure tobuy it with large enough wires to carryyour load. In most cases, you can use a# I 2 wire, but after determining the loadyou expect to put on the darkroom,check your building code t o see if this is

sufficient.Junction Boxes ( I 2). These are usedas a point to connect two o r morecables: they are the only place wherecables should be spliced or connectedto each other.

Switch Boxes ( I 3). These are similarto unction boxes, but somewhatsmaller in size, and are used wherever aswitch or outlet is to be connected.They are mounted t o a stud s o that thefront of the box will be flush with theeventual wall surface. The switch or

outlet is wired into them and thencovered with a face plate.

Light Fixture ( I 4). These are inex-pensive ceramic fixtures that attach t oswitch boxes recessed in the wall. Theyare ideal to use to screw in bulbs orsafelights and are a great deal cheaperthan more elaborate fixtures.

Grounded Plug ( I5). All cords in thedarkroom should have grounded plugssimilar to the one shown. This ensures

that the equipment ground will connectwith the grounded circuits in the housewiring.

Wir e Nuts ( I6). When connectingcable, the wires are stripped about 318”

back from the end and then two ormore can be held together by one ofthese “nuts.” The nuts eliminate theneed for soldering and are available indifferent sizes, depending on size or

number of wires to be connected.

Junction Box Cover ( I7). Once thewires have been installed in a junction

box ( I2), a protecting cover should bescrewed in place to close the box.

Wall Plates ( I8 and 19). Afterswitches or outlets are installed, theyare finished off by installing a plate overthe box in which they are mounted.

Connecter (20). These are used t oattach the cable when it enters thejunction box or switch. They shouldalways be used, because they protectthe cable from stress and abrasion.

Fasteners (2 I and 22). When in-stalling equipment against wallboard,

these fasteners can be used to mountin places where there is no backing intowhich screws can be fastened.

82

Page 94: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 94/201

2

6

7

8

9

10

I /

83

Page 95: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 95/201

Wiring the Circuits

How to Wire the Circuits

WHITE LIGHT CIRCUITS .-.

SAFE LIGHTS

How to Wi re the Circuits. This

drawing shows a typical darkroomcircuit with a master switch controllingseparate circuits for white lights, safe-lights, and a general circuit for the dryside. Wiring can be run directly fromthe fuse box, or it can begin from anavailable junction box-provided theload is within the limits of the circuitbeing tapped.

Things to Remember

I. Before working on any circuit, besure you pull the fuse or interrupt thecircuit breaker in the service panel. To

be safe, shut down the master powerswitch and ALSO remove the fuse forthe circuit you are working on. Use avoltage tester or plug in a lamp to besure the circuit is not hot. Do not becareless, since you can be fatally injuredby failing to follow this step.

2. Always use grounded cable for all

circuits. Grounded cable consists of awhite wire, a black wire, and a bare

copper wire. The bare copper wire is

the ground and should always be

5. The black wire is the hot wire

and should always be connected to thetwisted together with al l other groundwires in the same box and then fastenedto the box itself. This wil l ensure that allcircuits and boxes are a t the same elec-t r i ca l potential as the earth, and if thereis a short, the current will go throughthe ground wire and not you.

3. Always buy outlets that will ac-

cept the 3-pronged grounded plugs. Ifyou don’t, then the equipment itself willnot be grounded, even though the cir-cuit is, and you will be in danger andhave wasted your time grounding the

circuits.

neutral wire (this does not mean youcan touch it with the power on) andshould always be connected to thesilver terminal in outlets. When wiring a

switch, the white wire is connectedstraight through t o the other whitewires and should never be connected tothe switch terminals.

4. The white wire in the cable is the

brass terminals on switches and outlets.When wiring switches, it is the blackwire that is connected to the switch.

6 . Always use connectors whenrunning cable into a junction or switchbox. These connectors protect thecable from being cut by the rough edgesof the box and also from being pulledloose.

DANGER! No wiring shou ld be

attempted without having it in-spected. Failure to do so can be

extremely dangerous and in viola-

tion of local laws. The material in

this section is for descriptive pur-

poses so you can discuss it with a

licensed expert. Do not use these

drawings and captions as a guide

to wiring.

I

a4

Page 96: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 96/201

Page 97: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 97/201

Modular Control Panel

Building a Master Electric

Control Unit

When installing a darkroom in an

apartment, or in a finished room

that may eventually be convertedback to its original use, it is wise to

do as little interior conversion as

possible. This section shows you how

to build an electric control panel

that will pu t all of the electrical con-

trols at your fingertips. All that’s re-

quired, once it’s built, is to plug it in.

It has the following advantages over

rewiring the room:

1. It can be built in your shop, on

your kitchen table, or by a friend,

and then installed in the room just

by plugging it in.

2. It can be taken with you if you

move. All you have to do is plug it in

the next apartment o r house.

3. It has two outlets for safelights,

each on separate switches.

4. It can be adapted to allow the

unit to be plugged into two separate

outlets (provided they are on sepa-

rate circuits; see “How Your Electri-

cal Circuits Work” earlier in this

chapte r), thereby dividing the dark-

room load so it does not exceed the

limits of a single circuit.

5. It can be used to feed a remote

power strip installed elsewhere in

the room as a power supply. If the

control unit is mounted on the dry

side near the enlarger, the remote

strip would be near the wet side

(never close enough to the sink to

get wet), or vice versa.

This unit is based on the actual

switches listed. If you use differentswitches, the wiring will be different.

Wiring diagrams usually accompany

electrical parts and can be used as a

guide.

Building th e Case

6 3/4‘

Building he Case. The f i r s t step inassembling the control panel is to builda case to hold the switches and outlets.

This case can be cut, to the dimensionsindicated, from I 2” plywood. The backsides and ends are glued, then nailedtogether. The front panel is attached to

the case with wood screws, so that it

can be removed if necessary to repairwiring.

DANGER! No wiring should be

attempted without having it in-

spected. Failure to do so can be

extremely dangerous and in viola-tion of local laws. The material in

this section is for descriptive pur-

poses so you can discuss it with a

licensed expert. Do not use these

drawings and captions as a guide

to wiring.

86

Page 98: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 98/201

Wiring Diagram

GE SWITCH EAGLE EAGLE EAGLE EAGLE EAGLEWITH

LIGHT #270 4’274-291 #274 -291 #274-29/ X274-291

DUPLEX SWITCHED SWIZHED SWITCHED SWITCHED

m or o u m r OUTLET ourur o u m r oumr

Wiring Diagram. This wiring diagram

i s for a series of switches and outlets

identical to the ones listed. As all

switches vary in their design, switches

other than those indicated will require

slightly different wiring.

This view is from the back of the

switches. The best approach is to

mount the switches to the front panel

of the case before attempting o wire

them. This will keep them from shifting

about and lessens the chance of an

inadvertent short circuit.Never work on the panel with

power supplied to the circuits. Also,

have the wiring checked by a licensed

electrician prior to using it. All wiring i s

potentially dangerous, and it pays to be

sure that it has been done correctly.

This switch panel should be kept

well away from sources of water, and all

switches should be grounded to ensure

that shorts will not be dangerous. The Assembled Unit. This photo-

graph shows a completely assembled

unit built from the plans given on these

pages. The top switch (white) i s the

master power switch that controls al lother circuits. At the end of the session

in the darkroom, turningoff the master

switch shuts down al l darkroom cir-

cuits.

There are two outlets controlled

only by the master switch, and four

outlets controlled both by the master

switch and by their own switches.

87

Page 99: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 99/201

6 Building the Inside

Page 100: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 100/201

Contents

The Lighting Circuits

Lighting Equipment

Building a Dark room Sink

Building a Sink Stand

Installing Co unte rs

Building a Print-Drying Rack

Making the Dry ing Frames

Building a Light Box

Mountin g the Enlarger

Building an Adjustable Enlarger

Baseboard

Air Quality

Light-Proofing

Those Added C omforts

Page 101: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 101/201

The Lighting Circuits

Lighting the Darkroom

Lighting a darkroom has similar

considerations to taking pictures:

eliminating unwanted light an d con-

trolling the light you d o want. Laterwe will discuss making the room

dark by eliminating unwanted light.

This section deals with controlling

the light you do want.

General Lighting. There should be

sufficient illumination when the

main lights are on to clean the room

and to do general work that is no t in-

volved with light-sensitive materials.

For this purpose, regular incandes-

cent o r fluorescent fixtures are nor-

mally used. The switch for the lightson this circuit should be separated

from the other darkroom lights or

should have a switch guard to pre-

vent it from being turned on by mi s

take. The number of lights depends

to a large degree on the size of the

darkroom or workroom. Generally,

two 100-watt ixtures are sufficient.

Safelighting Safelighting provides fil-

tered light tha t will no t affect light-

sensitive materials. Each type of ma-

terial has a specified filter. Using thewrong filter can reduce the safety

factor or offers no protection a t all.

The intensity of the safelight desired

varies from photographer to photog-

rapher. Some like a darkroom that is

as bright as possible, and others a

more moody room with cones of

safelight only at key spots near the

enlarger and printdeveloping trays.

Use your own judgment in selecting

the type of lighting for the room you

Print-Viewing Lights. When the print

comes out of the fixer, it's usually

evaluated to determine what should

be modified to make the next print

better. To make an accurate evalua-

tion you need proper lighting. Too

plan.

little light or too much of the wrong

kind can seriously affect your deci-

sion. Light that is too bright will

make prints look weak and washed

out, whereas light that is too weak

will make them appear to be toodark. The solution is to have a view-

ing light in the darkroom that best

represents the light in which the

print will eventually be viewed.

With black and white prints, all

you need worry about is light inten-

sity. If you are printing for gallery

display, remember that the gallery

lights are much brighter than in the

average living room or bedroom.

Most galleries will have lighting of 80

to 100 foot candles, and that inten-

sity should be matched by the print-

viewing light. A dimmer switch, avail-

able in hardware stores, can be used

on the print-viewing light a nd cali-

brated to various viewing environ-

ments.

With color prints, the light in the

darkroom ideally should also be the

same color balance as the light by

which the prints will be finally

viewed-often, though no t always,

daylight. For convenience, many

photographers simply match their

darkroom light to a daylight bal-

ance. Kodak recommends for view-

ing color prints a light of 50 foot

candles or more, a color tempera-

ture of approximately 4,000'K, and

a color-rendering index of 85-100.

Deluxe cool-white fluorescent lights

come close to these requirements.

They should not be used for viewing

in conjunction with ordinary incan-

descent lights, which are of a differ-

en t color balance.

Light TabEe. It is generally helpful to

have a light table built into or sitting

on the dry-side counter. A light table

is the ideal way to view negatives

while making selections for enlarge-

ments. The light table can be cov-

ered with a large safelight filter so

that it can be left on while printing

(this will work only if you are print-

ing in black and white), or it can be

controlled with a dimmer switch.

Luminous Tape or Paint. You should

consider the use of phosphorescent

tape or paint to identify key items in

the room that you might need to

find in the dark, such as focusing

magnifier, print tongs, and drawer

handles. It's also helpful to indicate

any sharp corners so they can be

avoided in the dark. Even with good

delighting, the room will be dark

when working with film an d color

materials.

90

Page 102: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 102/201

Lighting Circuits Calibrated Print-Viewing Light

If you want to make prints that

are adjusted for the brightness of

light available where your pho-

tographs will be viewed, you can

calibrate your darkroom print-

viewing light using a regular light

meter, a standard photographic

gray card, and a dimmer switchinstalled on the print-viewing

light. First determine where the

prints will be viewed, either in the

home or in a gallery. Place the

gray card in the position the print

will occupy and illuminate it with

the lights that will be used to illu-

minate the print. Take a reading

from the gray card with the light

meter.

Now place the gray card under

the darkroom print-viewing light

in the position where prints will

normally be set for evaluation. In-stall the dimmer switch according

to the instructions. While watch-

ing the light meter, gradually in-

crease the light intensity until the

reading matches that obtained at

the position the print will eventu-

ally occupy. Mark the dimmer

switch to indicate its position so

you can repeat the se tting without

additional measurements. If you

print for a number of viewing

conditions, you will eventually

have a dimmer switch with vari-

ous settings indicated. Experi-ment with a trial print on the par-

ticular printing paper you are

using, because some papers dry

down to a tone that is darker than

when they are wet.

General Lights. These are standardceiling fixtures giving sufficient light to

work and clean the room when light-sensitive materials are not being used.

Safelights. The number of safelights is

determined by the size of the room andthe intensity o f the light desired. Safe-lights should be no closer than 4' fromenlarger baseboard or processing rays,otherwise fogging of paper i s possible.

Print-Viewing Light. Most photogra-phers like t o check thei r prints afterthey have been in the fixer for a fewminutes. I t ' s convenient t o have a lightnearby, because prints cannot be evalu-ated accurately under safelighting re-gardless of how bright it is.

Light Table. A small light table builtinto the counter i s handy t o use inselecting negatives.

91

Page 103: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 103/201

Lighting Equipment

Choosing a Safelight

Safelights contain a bulb and a col-

ored filter.As the light from the bulb

passes through the filter, portions of

it are blocked and only light of a cer-tain color is allowed to pass: this

light will not expose your enlarging

paper (it will affect film, however).

Although the light from a safelight is

dim, it does allow you to see in the

darkroom while making proofsheets

and enlargements. Two considera-

tions when buying a safelight are

where to pu t it and what kind of fil-

ter to use.

Kodak Safelight Filters

Kodak Safelight Filters are scientifically designed for safelight lamps to provide

maximum safe illumination plus protection from white light when using sensi-

tized materials:

OA (greenish yellow)-for black-and-white contact and duplicating materi-

OC (light amber)-for contact and enlarging papers

00 (light yellow)-for flash exposure technique with Kodak Contact

No. 1 (red)-for blue-sensitive materials, most photo-typesett ing materials,

No. 1A (light red)-for slow orthochromatic materials, Kodalith and Koda-

No. 2 (dark red)-for fast orthochromatic materials, some green-sensitive x-

No 3 (dar k green)-for some panchromatic materials

No. 6B (brown)-for blue-sensitive x-ray filmsNo. 8 (dark yellow)-for some Eastman Color Print and Intermediate Films

No. 10 (dark amber)-for Vericolor slide film 5072, Vericolor print film

4111,and Panalure papers

No. 11 (appears opaque, transmits infrared radiation)-for use with infra-

red scope and similar inspection devices (available only in 5 1/2" diameter)

No. 13 (amber)-for all Ektacolor, Panalure, Panalure and Resisto Rapid

Pan Papers

GBX-2-for all blue- and most green-sensitive medical and dental x-ray films

als, and projection films

Screens (available only in 5 1/2" diameter)

Kodagraph Projection, and some Linagraph Papers

graph orthochromatic materials, and high-resolution plates

ray films, Ektaline Papers, an d Orthochromatic Linagraph Papers

Where to Put It. Safelights can bescrewed into existing ceiling or lampfixtures, mounted on the wall, or placeddirectly on your counter. To reduce thechance of fogging (an overall graying ofyour paper), keep in mind that thesafelight (with a I5 w bulb) should belocated at least 4' ( I I 4 m) from whereyour paper is exposed and processed.

Safelight Location Wh at K ind of Filter

IDALL

utwr

b

m

QWhat Kind of Filter. The instructionsheet packed with your paper (open thepackage only in the dark to remove it)

specifies a particular type of filter. Mostenlarging papers require a light amberfilter, such as a Kodak Wratten OC.

Safelight filters are usually purchasedseparately from the safelight itself andcome in a variety of shapes and sizes.

92

Page 104: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 104/201

Print-Viewing Light. A small wall-mounted light t o use in evaluatingprints is very useful. This model fromEdmund Scientific has importantfeatures, such as a shielded light forincreased brightness, and a swivelbracket that allows it to be posi-tioned as needed. The arm also slidesinto a closed position only 3" longand extends out t o I I" .

Util ity Safelight. The Kodak utilitysafelight modelD s a good example of a

safelight that can be suspended from theceiling. The light is then reflected down-wardfrom the ceiling for even illumina-tion throughout the room.

odak Two-way Safelight. ThisKodak two-way safelight is a Dooular

I ,

model. It is inexpensive and effective.The light is directed in t wo directionsfor even illumination. To install, screw it

into an existing socket and you're ready

to print.

Courtesy Eastman Kodak Company

Courtesy Eastman Kodak Company

5 112" Round Safelights. This 5 1/2"

safelight system consists of a housing,filters, and a universal base. It uses

standard 5 112" f i l ters available fromKodak and others. The universal basecan be mounted on a wall o r ceiling orstood on a counter top. An alternativesocket base allows the safelight to bescrewed into an existing light socket.

Illuminated Magnifier. A combina-tion magnifying glass and flashlight that i s

useful for examining 35mm contactproof sheets.homas Sodium-Vapor Safelight. This sodium-vapor safelight puts out light

from a very narrow part of the spectrum, one which has the least effect on photo-graphic papers, but t o which the human eye is most sensitive. The result is a lightbright enough to read the fine print in the next contract for your photographic ser-vices. This is an excellent choice if you want a bright darkroom in which to work.

93

Page 105: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 105/201

Building a Darkroom Sink

A sink is a basic piece of darkroom

equipment. A long sink made ou t of

wood, plastic, fiberglass, or stainless

steel will hold print-processing trays

plus the print washer.

Darkroom sinks make it easier tokeep the darkroom clean by con-

taining spills that, a t the end of a ses-

sion, can be flushed ou t with a hose.

Because many chemicals dry to a

powdered state that can be carried

by air currents onto sensitive materi-

als, it is essential that they be re-

moved, and the sink provides the

most efficient way of doing so. In ad-

dition to improving cleanliness, a

darkroom sink allows all of the pro-

cessing trays to be immersed in a

water bath to help maintain their

correct temperature.

You can buy a sink, but the vast

majority of photographers build

their own sinks out of plywood,

which is then caulked and sealed

with epoxy o r o the r waterproofing

material.

Rail to Lean On

SINK FRONT

_ -SfDE

Rail to Lean On. Neither 1/2" nor3/4" plywood provides much of an edgeto lean on. Since you wil l want t o leanon the sink while rocking trays, it helpst o install a piece of I 2"-wide casing (ormolding) along the front sink frame towiden the top edge. This will make thesink front much more comfortable towork on.

Making the Sink Sidewall Frame

I SIDE

Making the Sink Sidewall Frame. The sink frame can be made out of a variety ofmaterials but the most popular is I 2" or 3/4" plywood. Because the sink will bepainted, a lower grade of plywood called "plug and touch," which is finished on oneside, is suitable for it s construction. The sides should be approximately 8 deep andlong enough and wide enough t o hold the number of processing rays you plan onusing (see the section on "Wet-Side Cutouts" in Chapter 4 for various sink sizes).After the pieces are cut to the correct length they should be glued and then nailed orscrewed into place. Use a carpenter's square to ensure that the corners are squarewhen assembling.

Sink Frame

ITI

INSIDE LENGm MINUS I/8"

SINK 0 O m M

Building and Installing the Sink Bottom. After you have finished the frame,measure the inside dimensions. Cut a piece of 112" plywood so that it f i ts into thesink side-wall frame with as l i t t le clearance on all sides as possible. As a startingpoint, the plywood should be cut 1/8"shorter and narrower than the inside dimen-sions of the sink frame. If it does not fit, sand off the excess wood until it f its snuglyinto the frame.

94

Page 106: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 106/201

Waterproofing the Sink

Measuring for Bottom Slope

r I

A ' 8 C

Measuring for Bottom Slope. After the sink bottom has been cut to size, it mustbe installed in the sink so that it t i l t s enough t o drain toward one end or the other.Do his by installing he bottom supports a t gradually increasing heights along thelength of the sink. Cut these supports out of I x I"or I x 2" lumber to a lengthequal to that of the sink end pieces.

To build in the slope at the bottom, draw a sloping line down both long sides ofthe inside of the sink frame as a guide line for nailing n the cross pieces. Make onemark a t point A and A flush with the bot tom of the sink frame. Halfway down thesink, make a mark at B and B' 1 /8 above the sink frame bottom, and at the other endof the sink (C and C'), place a mark indicating a point 1/4" above the sink bottom.Connect these three points with a straightedge and you will have a sloping line as aguide for where to nail the bottom edge of each support piece.

If your drain will be in a far corner and you decide that you also need a front-to-back slope, you can raise the A, B, and C, or A, B', and C' measurements an addi-tional 118' above the measurements on the other part of the frame.

Installing Bottom Supports

I I

Installing Bottom Supports. Hold each support cross piece in position and drive

a long nail through the front of the sink and into the support. Since you will be nailingblind, it may help to f i rs t measure where the support is to be located inside the sink

and then transfer this measurement o the outside. Nail the support on the otherside (back) of the sink, and continue wi th each of the subsequent cross pieces. Makesure that the bottom of each cross piece is aligned with the guide line that indicatesthe tilt of the sink bottom.

place.When all of the supports are nailed in place, insert the sink bot tom and nail it into

The assembled sink must be made

waterproof before it is used. The

first step is to caulk all of the seams

on the inside of the sink using an

acrylic caulking compound, which

comes in tubes and is available at

most hardware stores or lumber sup-

ply houses. Run a bead around the

bottom of the sink and up the four

corners. To make it form a smooth

surface use a large 3/4" to 1"

wooden dowel to make a curve in

the caulk. This is done by running a

bead of caulk the length of the seam

and then running the dowel along

the bead, smoothing it as it is pulled

along.

The sink can now be painted with

a waterproofing material. Epoxy

paint can be used, or you can fiber-

glass the inside. The demands put

on the typical sink do n ot require

the use of fiberglass cloth but it is

commonly used. (Strips of fiberglass

cloth can be used in conjunction

with epoxy resin to seal the seams if

you choose not to use acrylic caulk.)

Epoxy by itself will tend to crack if

the sink is moved or pushed out of

alignment. We can recommend the

following sink coatings:

Sherwin-WilliamsTile Clad IIcomes in

two parts and, when mixed and ap-

plied, dries to a hard surface finish.

Epoxy Resin is the most commonly

used coating. It can be applied like

paint directly on the wooden sink

and will provide sufficient water-

proofing. Seams can be sealed by

embedding cloth tape in the wet

epoxy and then repainting the top

surface with more epoxy.

One of the best places to find

good sink-waterproofingmaterials is

a marine supply store. Anything

used to keep water ou t of a boat canalso be used to keep water in your

sink. New waterproofing products

come on the market frequently, so

you should visit a good store if you

want to know what the latest prod-

ucts are.

95

Page 107: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 107/201

Building a Sink Stand

After the sink itself has been com-

pleted, it is necessary to find a place

to put it other than flat on the floor.

If the darkroom is in a bathroom o r

other room that is used for more

than one purpose, the sink can bemounted on chair rails (1 1/2” x 1

1/2” molding) along three walls of

the room. This allows the sink to be

removed easily an d the chair rails do

not detract from the room.

However, you may want to build a

permanent sink stand that is sturdy

enough to hold the sink and can also

provide additional storage space.

This section covers both of these

possibilities.

Leveling the Sink

CARPENTER‘SLEVEL

/J

u

PIECE OF SHINGLE70 LEVEL SINK.USED 70 RAISELOW EN0

Leveling the Sink. Once the sinkstand has been finished, it should beinstalled in the darkroom and leveled.Use a carpenter’s level and small piecesofwood such as shingle. Put the levelon the top rail and level the sink length-wise using the wood pieces t o raise thelow end. After you level the sink in the

long direction, follow the same proce-dure to level it front to back.

No w place the sink itself on top ofthe sink stand. The sink bottom’s built-in tilt should now be at the correctangle for proper drainage.

Building the Sink Stand. The sinkstand should be constructed with 2 x 4s

nailed or bolted together. The outsidedimensions should be the same as theoutside dimensions of the sink itself.

same lengths as the sink side walls.Make two sets to provide support atboth the top and bottom of the sinkstand.

No w cut the four legs to the heightyou want the sink bottom above thefloor. Because the sink bottom i s actu-ally a few inches above the bottom ofthe sink side-wall frame, cut the legs afew inches shorter than the ideal heightto allow for the difference.

Assemble the two sets of side-railframes for the stand, and then belt ornail the legs in place as shown in the

illustration.

Begin by cutting the base rails t o the

Page 108: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 108/201

Page 109: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 109/201

Installing Counters

Installing Dry-Side

Counters and Storage

Counters a nd storage cabinets can

be custom-made for a darkroom, but

they can be very expensive. Theknow-how required to build them

yourself is also extensive. The ideal

solution is to use kitchen cabinets

and post-formed (seamless) counter

tops. Cabinets can usually be picked

up quite cheaply at sales or in used

condit ion. Since visual appeal is not

as important in the darkroom as it is

in the kitchen, damaged units, poor

sellers, and inexpensive units all be-

come candidates for your Dark-

room.

Base Units. Counter base units come

in standard widths from 9" to 42 " in

increments of 3".They are standard-

ized at a 24" depth.

Counter Tops. Pre-made counter tops

are available in long strips 25 "wide;

the building supply company can

cut them to the length you need.

There are two styles available, o ne

with a flat lip on the front edge and

one with a rolled lip. Avoid the

rolled lip since large items such as a

paper trimmer will not rest flat on

the counter.

dLAT LIP

kzslOLLED LIP

Currently, pre-formed counter

tops cost less than $1 5 per running

foot. A counter top for a large dark-

room with a 10' dry side (minus 30"

for the enlarger base) would cost ap-

proximately $115. It would be diff-cult to custom-build one for less, es-

pecially if tools had to be purchased.

Dry-Side Wa ll Cabinets

Wall Cabinets. Wall cabinets are also

available from building supply com-

panies and can be installed above

the dry-side base cabinets for addi-

tional storage. They come in the

same standard widths as the basecabinets, but are only 12"deep.

Dry-Side Base Cabinets

WALL COMBINATION CABINETSFOR USE OVER ENLARGER

DOOR/DRAWERuwr

IW

END PANELS ARE MADE FOR WALLAND BASE CABINETS

Dry-Side Wal l Cabinets. Wall cabi-nets come in lengths of 24" o 4 8 nincrements of 3". They range in heightfrom 12" to 30".

Dry-Side Base Cabinets. Base cabi-nets are available in sizes ranging from9" to 4 8 n incrementsof 3". Theycome with doors, drawers, or a combi-nation of both. Although their standardheight is 34 1/2" (36" once the countertop is installed), they can be raised bybuilding a base under them.

98

Page 110: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 110/201

Dry-Side Assembly

FWORESCENT FIXTUREIN DRAWER To MOUNT ENLdRGER

LEAVE PIECE OF COUNFRTOPWIDE ENOUGH

LSTRIPS SCREWED TO CABIffETS FORroE Room ADJUSTABLE ENLARGER BASEBOARD

Dry-Side Assembly. This view showshow the dry-side cabinets can be assem-bled to accommodate the enlargermount, adjustable easel baseboard, andlight table.

When ordering pre-formed countertops, you can have them custom-cutand finished for both the enlarger andthe built-in light table.

Professional Cabinets. This dry-sidecabinet is a good example of a profes-sionally designed and manufactured unit.Such units are extremely well-made, butthe high quality comes with a relativelyhigh price tag.

99

Page 111: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 111/201

Building a Print-Drying Rack

A homemade print-drying rack

utilizing fiberglass screens is easy to

build and can either be made to

stand alone or built-in. The rack

consists of twomajor elements:

1. Frames with fiberglass screen

stretched over them. The frames

provide the rigidity required to keep

the fiberglass flat and tight. The

fiberglass screen supports the print,

but at the same time allows air to cir-

culate freely on all sides of the print ,

contributing to even, fast drying.

Fiberglass screen should be used be-

cause it is impervious to darkroom

chemicals and will no t rust. It is also

nonabsorbent, so if a poorly washed

print does come in contact with it,

the screen can be washed clean to

protect subsequent prints.

The frames on which the fiber-

glass screens are s tretched can be

made out of 1"x 1"wood cut at a 45"

angle to make corner joints similar

to a picture frame. For this you need

a mitre box and saw. Frames can also

be constructed out of aluminum

window screen frames. Aluminum

framing members can be bought ei-

ther in long lengths or precut to the

size you desire. Wooden canvas

stretchers available in artists' supply

stores also work quite well and are al-

ready pre-cut, making tools unneces-sary.

If you choose to make the racks

out of aluminum framing, you will

also need what is called "Spline," the

rubber gasket that locks the screen

into the frame, and an installation

tool.

2. Rails on which the frames will

slide in and out and a cabinet to

hold them. The rail can be either

aluminum angle iron, wooden rails

made out of 1"x l" ,or wood mold-

ing that is L-shaped. Regardless of

which is chosen, they should be in-

stalled level and parallel so the

frames slide in and out easily. They

should be spaced approximately 3"

or more apart to allow for free air

circulation in the rack.

If the printdrying rack is to be in-

stalled under the sink, be sure to

build the sink and its stand first so

that exact measurements for the

printdrying rack can be taken from

the actual unit (see "Building a Sink

Stand" above). This will ensure that

the rack fits into the existing space.

The EasyWay Out

A simple print-drying rack can be

made with a long piece of fiberglass

screen, two wooden dowels, and

some string. The dowels are stapled

to each end of the screen and the

unit is suspended like a hammock.

When no t in use, it can be rolled up

and stored. It's also easy to keep

clean because it can be washed in

the sink.

If you use an old (o r new) window

shade roller in place of one dowel

and attach it permanently to a wall

you can pull the screen o ut when

needed. Just attach it to a hook on

an opposite wall. When finished, you

unhook i t and it rolls back up by it-

self. Be sure the roller is mounted

with enough space between it and

the wall to allow the fiberglass screen

to roll all the way up.

"Hammock" on Window-Shade Roller "Hammock" Drying Screen

I00

Page 112: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 112/201

Print-Drying Rack

Buildingthe Print-Drying Rack. The cabinet needed to hold t he fiberglass

frames can be made out of either I 2" or 3/4" plywood. Th e thicker material will givea m or e stable cabinet. Begin by determining the size frame yo u need to hold your

prints, and then calculate the size cabinet you will require to hold frames of the cho-

sen size.

Measure the two side pieces so hey are the exact length of one of the dimen-

sions of yo ur frames. The back piece should then be measured off so it i s as wide as

the othe r dimension of the frame, plus an additional am ount a t each end (either I /2"o r 3 / 8 where it will overlap the side pieces).

The back and side panels should be the same height. The he ight depends on

where you plan on putting the cabinet and the number o f drying frames you want it

to hold.

Measure the t op and bo tto m panels of the cabinet. They should be the same

wi dt h as the b ack panel and the same length as th e sides, plus an additional 1/2" or

3/4" where they will overlap th e back panel.

Now measure whe re the rails on which the frames will rest will be placed. Theyshould be 3" apart. Begin by measuring down fro m the t op of the side panels 3" and

draw a line across each panel.

Measure off another 3" and do the same. Continue doing this fo r the entire length

of bo th panels. Now cu t I " x 2" lengths o f woo d as lon g as the panel is wide. C ut as

many as you have marked o n the side panels. Na il and glue them in to place using the

lines draw n to ensure that they are level and parallel.

Nai l and glue the side panels to the back panel, and then d o the same with both

the to p and bo tto m panels. The cabinet is no w complete with th e frame guides in

place.

Details of the Frame Supports

314"FLATHEAOWOOD SCREWS

CHANNEL

/

3/4"FL ATHEAD

W OO SCREWS

I LbMINlUAt CHAMEL

Details of the Frame Supports.

These drawings show h ow various types

of frame supports can be attached to

the side panels of the print-drying rack.

101

Page 113: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 113/201

Making the Drying Frames

After the cabinet has been com-

pleted, the next step is to build the

frames to hold the fiberglass screen.

There are three principal ways to

make these screen frames: wooden

frames, canvas stretchers, and alu-minum frames.

Wooden Frames

Wooden frames can be made out of

any lumber from 1” x 1“up to 1”x

3”.Begin by measuring the inside of

the printdrying cabinet. Make the

frames about 1/8” to 1/4“ smaller to

allow them to slide in and out easily.

The frames can be mitred or square

cut at the corne r joints. Becausethere is very little weight on the

screens, the joints do not have to be

extremely strong. The corners of the

frames can be joined with screws,

nails, angle irons, or corrugated

nails. A Stanley “Sure-Drive’’ et can

save you a great deal of time. This

makes firm joints and is both easier

and faster than using either nails or

screws. Wooden frames should al-

ways be painted to keep them from

absorbing chemicals.

Frame Assembled with

Angle Irons

I02

Frame Assembled with Stanley “Sure-Drive”

Brace two pieces of wood in position to

be joined.Place Sure-Drive across joint. Remove

driver and insert corrugated nail with

sharp edge down.

Replace driver and hammer firmly.keep-

ing track of guide line on driver.When guide ine sflushwith opof holder,

nail will be seated flush with sutface of

joined pieces.

+ame Assembled with Stanley

“Sure-Drive.” This fastening device and

too l is ideal fo r making a large numbe r ofjoints in a very sho rt time. Be sure to bu y

corrug ated nails no deeper tha n one-half

the thickness o f your frame.

Frame Assembled with

Screws

‘DRILL cwmER-SUNU HOLE

Attaching the Screen to

Wooden Frames

STAPLES

1RAME

Attaching the Screen to WoodenFrames. After the woo den f rame is

assembled, staple the fiberglass screen t o

it so hat the screen is t ight and free o fwrinkles . Th e easiest way is to use a staple

gun to staple the screen in place. Because

galvanized staples are almos t impossible t obuy, the heads should be tou ched up with

varnish t o prevent them fr om rust ing. It s

also advisable t o p aint or varnish the

wooden frames before attaching the

screening. This will keep them fr om ab-

sorbing chemicals that can contaminatesubsequent prints.

Page 114: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 114/201

Canvas Stretc hers Aluminum Frames

Canvas Stretchers. Wooden canvas

stretchers are available from most a r t

supply stores. They come pre-cut in differ-

ent sizes and can be easily assembled in a

variety of combinations. The joints are

pre-cut to slip together, and they can be

glued or nailed to give the joint greater

strength.

Aluminum Frame Members and

Fiberglass Screen. These photographs

show what the aluminum frame members

look like. The round material is the

“spline” and is used to hold the fiberglass

screen in place once the frames have been

assembled. Fiberglassscreen comes in

rolls of different widths. Buy the size

closesf to the width of your frames.

1. Measure the width and depth of the

nside of your print drying rack. Mark two

engths (depth minus %”) of screen sec-

,ion for the side frame pieces and two

ddths (width minus ’/a”) for the top and

xdtom of frame pieces.

2.Remove the U-shaped splines or glaz-

ing channels from all the frame members.

6. Cut screening to outside dimensions

of frame. Cut carefully between two

screen wires to keep screening square.

Place frame on table and scatter scraps

of frame section in the center area to

hold screening level with top of frame.

On large frames you may want to nail

small %“-thickblocks around frame to

maintain squareness as shown in illus-

tration 2.

7. Line up screening with the outside

edge of the screen groove at the side

and end of the frame shown. Bend the

screening into the side and end grooves.

When using fiberglass screen it should fit

down, across, and up inside of grooves.

3. Mark 45degree angles at the mea-

sured points.

SAW END AT45’ANGLE

4. Saw off the ends, using a fine-toothed

coping or hack saw. Smooth cut ends

with file or sandpaper.

5. Insert corner locks into the two short

frame pieces. Slip the two long frame

pieces onto one of the end pieces. Final-

ly, add the other end as shown to com-

plete the frame.

8. After completing operation along one

side (as in step above), cut off excess

screen cloth along line even with outside

edge of groove in other adjacent leg.

9. Cut U-shaped splines 1/16” less than

length of spline groove; make butt joints

at the corners. Next, tap spline into

groove using block of wood with round-

ed front comer (on one long frame

piece) to hold screening securely. In the

same manner, form screen cloth on the

two short sides, cut off excess screen

cloth, and insert spline. Then, complete

fourth side.

Aluminum Frames. You can either buy pre-assembled aluminum frames from a win-

dow supply house, or you can assemble them yourself. To do a complete job, you will

need frame members, a mitre saw, a “spline” tool, and fiberglass screen.

I03

Page 115: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 115/201

Page 116: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 116/201

LEAVE SUFFICENT SLACKIN WfS CABLE 7V JUNCTIONALLOW rnEORAWER BOX

WND FLUORESCENT WHIE IwREs

LIGHT FIXTURE

Seal the frame on the outside by apply-ing a uniform bead of caulking to theunder-outside edge of the frame-topflange.

Install the light table assembly intothe counter top cutout. From the un-derside of the counter top, attach thelugs onto the hook of the frame leg.Always place two ugs as close as possi-ble t o each side of the corner bends.

Space and tighten lug bolts evenly andfirmly until top flanges of the frame are

clamped tightly t o both the counter topand the insert. Caution: Do not over-tighten lugs. Additional unnecessarypressure may distort the frame causing

gaps.

Courtesy Hudee ManufacturingCo.

Use the drawer under the counter, orbuild in a box t o hold the fluorescentlight fixture. The inside should be

painted white t o give an even distribu-tion of light.

Wi re the light using either a regular on-off switch, or a dimmer switch made forfluorescent lights. Mount the switch onthe front of the drawer where it will bewithin easy reach. The junction box forthe connection should be under thecounter and out of the way. Be sure theline running to the drawer has sufficientslack in the wire t o allow you to openthe drawer t o change the tube when

necessary.

I05

Page 117: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 117/201

Mounting the Enlarger

Normally when you purchase an en-

larger, it comes mounted to a

wooden or composition baseboard.

With minimal effort, you can make

improvements in two significant

areas: reducing vibrations and in-creasing the size of prints that can be

made.

Reducing Vibration

The sharpness of an enlarged print

depen ds on the sharpness of the

camera and enlarging lenses, the

type of film used, and the shutter

speed or firmness of support used at

the time the picture was taken. Afac-

tor quite often overlooked is thesteadiness of the enlarger at the time

the enlargement is made. There is

vibration in every enlarger column.

This vibration is either picked up

from the surrounding environment

(such as passing trucks, trains, or

kids running in the apartment above

the darkroom), or it is induced

when you make adjustments to the

enlarger while preparing to make a

print. Because the enlarger acts as

an upside-down pendulum, the vi-

brations picked up by the base aremagnified by the time they reach the

enlarger head perched on top of the

column.

Since all enlargers, regardless of

manufacturers’ claims, are subject to

vibrations, the true science should

be applied to reducing vibrations or

damping them out of the system as

far as possible. As long as the col-

umn is no t oscillating at the time the

print is made, the image will be

sharp. Part of the damping of the vi-

brations will be a result of good de-sign on the part of the enlarger man-

ufacturer. The rest depends on

where you use the enlarger and how

you mount it. The best design in the

world will not make an enlarger

steady if it is used on an unstable

base.

The Pendulum Effect EliminatingVibrations

The Pendulum Effect. The enlargercolumn acts as an inverted pendulum. Thevibrations that are picked up by the base-board are magnified as they go higher up

the column. The column will no longer actas a pendulum if the top of the column is

supported. This would be the same asholding the bot tom o f a pendulum andpreventing it from swinging.

DampingVibrations

Enlarger A”.. I

. , , I . . . * .

*c

EnlargerB”.. I

. , , , . . . .

I-

Vivitar VI Enlarger”.. -I

Damping Vibrations. Contrary to whatyou might think, making an enlarger col-umn more rigid (or stiff) will not help t odampen out the vibrations faster. In fact, astiff column will only vibrate at a higherfrequency, which makes vibrations last

longer. These graphs show how the Vivi-tar IV enlarger, by using a more flexiblecolumn, actually dampens vibrations fasterthan a more rigid enlarger would.

SCREWEYE( T u R y > HANG”lCfURE-

WIRZc

IBLOCK OF WOO0

EliminatingVibrations. The enlargercan be made more steady, giving sharperprints, by attaching the top of the columnto a wall or o ther very solid surface. Becareful, however, since this wil l not help,and in fact can make things worse, if thewall is no t solid and stable. Buy somepicture hanging wire, a screw eye, and asmall turnbuckle in the hardware store.Cut the wire into two lengths and attachto either end of the turnbuckle. No wscrew the screw eye in the wall directlybehind the enlarger and fasten one of thewires to it. Fasten the other to the en-larger (you may have to drill a hole for it).

No w tighten the turnbuckle just enoughto put pressure on the enlarger column.Too much pressure will distort the col-umn, so be gentle.

If you want the enlarger farther outfrom the wall, insert a block of wood ofthe necessary length behind it.This will

keep the enlarger from moving backwardas the turnbuckles are tightened.

I06

Page 118: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 118/201

Increasing Print Size

The major factor that determines

how large a print you can make with

a given lens/film form at combina-

tion is the distance between the neg-

ative and the paper on which the

print is being projected.

Most enlargers are capable of

making prints up to 11"x 1 4 on the

baseboard, and longer columns are

also available with options allowing

prints as large as 16" x 20" to be

made. In either case, larger print

sizes can be made by wall-mounting

the enlarger.

Wall-mounting the enlarger is

usually done in conjunction with

building an adjustable enlarger

baseboard. This increases the range

of print sizes that can be made con-

veniently. The following pages illus-

trate how to build one of these units.

Most enlarger manufacturers

make wall-mount units for their en-

largers that are relatively inexpen-

sive. You can also build your own,

provided you are handy with tools.

Before doing so, it is wise to check

how steady the wall in the room is.

Exterior walls are generally well-

made since they are designed to

carry the weight of the house. Inte-

rior walls are either load-bearing or

not; the ones that are not load-bear-

ing are usually less steady. If possible,use an exterior wall or an interior

load-bearing wall to mount the en-

larger. Generally, shorter walls will

be more stable than taller walls, be-

cause their supports are closer to-

gether.

Using Two Turnbuckles. A singlecolumn enlarger can be made even stead-ier by using two sets of turnbuckles.

Wall-Mounting the Enlarger

LAG BOLT LONG

ENOUGH 70 GO

THROUGH MOW

ANDZ"IN70

Wall-Mounting the Enlarger. The firs t step in mounting the enlarger is to devise asupport t q which it can be fastened. The type of support will vary, depending on the typeof flange used to bolt the enlarger to its base. The easiest support can be made from afew feet of 4" x 4" lumber from a local lumber supply store. I f the flange on the enlarger islarger than 4" buy a 6"x 6" or larger piece of wood. This can be bolted to the wall studs

(not t o the plaster or plaster board) with long "lag bolts," and then the enlarger can bemounted to it. The top of the column should then be supported with turnbuckles andpicture-hanging wire t o eliminate any vibrations in the column.

Another Wall Mount

BOLTS TO ATTACH ENLARGER

TO MOUNT\

COUNTERSUNK FLAT-HEAD W D CREWS

\

LAG BOLTS LONG

ENOUGH r0 GO

I I/.' INTO

WALL STUDS

Another Wall Mount. In some cases it may be necessary to build a more complicated

support on which t o mount the enlarger. If the flange on the enlarger is wider than 6" , it

is generally better t o use a 2"-thick plank, wide enough to accommodate the enlarger-mounting flange. This plank can then be mounted horizontally t o the wall by cuffing sup-ports f or both ends out of the same plank.

Page 119: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 119/201

Building anAdjustable Enlarger

With a given film format/lens com-

bination, the sole determining fac-

tor as to what size prints can be

made is the distance between the

negative and the paper surface. This

can be increased by raising the en-larger head u p the column, but at

some point it can go no farther. In

addition, problems with vibration

are increased as the head is raised

higher.

An adjustable baseboard can be

built to allow for greater print sizes.

It is essentially a unit that decreases

or increases the negative-tc-easel dis-

tance by raising or lowering the shelf

on which the easel rests. The lower

the shelf, the greater the size of the

enlargement.

Pr in t Sizes

Print Sizes. The enlarger projects acone-shaped image that grows in sizethe farther it gets from the enlargerlens. To obtain a larger image, the easelmust be placed farther from the lens ina wider section of the cone.

Determinng Shelf

Heights

When making an adjustable en-

larger baseboard, you should take

into account the size of the printsyou make most often. The shelf for

this print size should be placed at

countertop height for maximum

comfort. Very much larger print

sizes will be lower and very much

smaller print sizes higher, but be-

cause they are made less frequently,

the resulting discomfort is mini-

mized.

Most enlargers will print u p to 11 "

x 14 ' on the baseboard, a nd some

will go as high as 16" x 20". There-

fore, it is likely that one of these sizes

will be the one placed on the shelf at

counter-top height.

Keep in mind that if you crop

your prints considerably, you may ac-

tually be enlarging to 16 ' x 20" size

to obtain the 11"x 14" print youwant.

Negative-to-Easel Distance

Baseboard

Selecting the Easel

Shelf Size

The size of the enlarger baseboard

you need is based on the size of the

largest easel you plan on using. Ifyou normally prin t 8"x 10"but occa-

sionally want to pr int up to 20" x 24",

the baseboard should be designed to

handle the easel for a 20" x 2 4 ' print

in either a horizontal or vertical

alignment. This will require a shelf

size of at least 28" x 28"; the shelf,

side, and back panels, plus the shelf

supports, should be cut accordingly.

Be sure to allow for the size of the

easel, not the print, plus handling

room on either side of the easel.

The shelf can have handles at-

tached to the top side on both sides

to make it easier to lift in and out

when it's being raised or lowered.

Negative-to-EaselDistances. When making an enlargement fro& a given neg-

ative size, the significant factor determining the size of enlargement that is pos-sible is the distance between the negative and the paper on which the image is

projected. Secondary factors that influence maximum print size include in-

creased exposure times, reciprocity failure, loss of contrast, and vibration, but

for the moment these will be discounted. This table is designed to give you the

approximate distance your negative must be from the pape r (easel surface) to

obtain a specific print size from the most common film format/enlarger lens

focal-length combinations. Decide first what print sizes you want to make.

Once that size is established, you can de termine what range of distances has to

be obtained for the minimum and maximum sizes you want to print. If, for in-

stance, you want to make both 5"x 7" and 2 0 ' x 24" prints using a 50mm lens

and 35mm film, you must be able to increase the distance between the negative

and the easel from a minimum distance of approximately 11" to a maximum

distance of 36",or a total range of 25". Some enlargers can accommodate this

range on the baseboard tha t comes with the enlarger, but on most, you will ei-ther have to project the image on the floor, tilt the head to project on a facing

wall, or build an adjustable enlarger baseboard.

If YourFilm F m t EnlarrincLRns Cambination Is:

Print size 35 mm jl m 2% ~ 2 %%n 2% ~ 3 %%n 4 x 5 f i l mdesired 50 mm enlarffing lens 75mm lens lO0mm lens 150mm lens

8 x 1 0 18 " 15" 17" 18"

11 x 14 26" 20" 22" 23"

16 x 20 3 4 27" 30" 30"

20 x 24 37" 33" 3 6 36"

I08

Page 120: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 120/201

Page 121: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 121/201

Page 122: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 122/201

Darkroom Air Flow

Darkroom Air Flow. If the fan i s

mounted to blow into the room, the fanshould be installed on he dry side ofthe darkroom with the vents on thewet side. The ai r entering the room willkeep it a t a positive pressure, and a ir

will flow out of the cracks in the room,which keeps the dust out.

Should you decide to use the fan as

an exhaust fan blowing air out of theroom, it should be mounted on the wet

side, so that the moist air from the sinkand chemicals exi t immediately withoutbeing distributed throughout the room.

Ventilator Fan. Special light-prooffans are baffled to prevent light fromleaking through the fan opening. Theyare often hard to find, so most photog-raphers just use a regular bathroom fanand build a light-proof baffle around it

themselves. In some cases, you may beable to vent the fan into a dark at t i c orbasement and avoid the need for abaffle entirely.

Exhaust Vents. Darkroom ventsshould be light-proof. Spiratone suppliesthese 4“-diameter “DarkroomBreather” vents.

Humidity and Temperature Indica-

tor. This combination humidity andtemperature indicator is a good itemfo r the darkroom. Then again, perhapsignorance s bliss.

Page 123: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 123/201

LightlProofing

Light-proofing s essential to prevent

light-sensitive film and paper from

fogging. Many prints lack contrast

between shadow and highlight areas

because the paper or film was ex-

posed to non-imaging light thatmade the contrast muddy. This ef-

fect is sometimes so slight that it can

be discovered only by running a

proper test, but once comparison

prints are made, the loss of quality

will become immediately apparent.

Film, with its higher speed, is

much more susceptible to light than

is enlarging paper; therefore, a

room in which printing is done need

not be as light-proof as a room in

which film is handled. A kitchen or

other temporary darkroom can usu-

ally be light-proofed sufficiently to

make prints (or you could print only

at night), and film can be loaded

into reels and placed in daylight

tanks inside a changing bag. To be

sure a room is light-proof enough to

print, first stand in it with the lights

out for at least five minutes so your

eyes have a chance to adjust com-

pletely. If you then cannot see a

plain white paper held against a

dark background the room should

be safe. A few small leaks around

doors and windows are safe if they

are not near the enlarger or process-

ing trays or paper cutter. Such leaks

can be eliminated, however, with

aluminum foil crumpled and stuck

into holes or taped in sheets over

larger openings. Larger areas can be

covered with light-proof cloth or

black garden plastic and tape.

WindowsWindows can be light-proofed using

special shades made specifically for

the purpose. These shades are rela-

tively expensive but are convenient

if the darkroom must be used for

other purposes. A somewhat less ex-

pensive method is to use light-proof

cloth fastened to the wall or window

frame with Velcro tape, which is

available in sewing supply stores.

One part of the tape can be perma-

nently mounted to the window

frame and the other sewn to the

cloth. The two can then be stuck to-

gether and pulled apart as need be.When the cloth is not being used, it

is easy to fold and store.

A third method is to use masonite

paneling and either Velcro tape or

screws to hold it in place. These pan-

els can be made cheaply and are to-

tally light-proof.

Windows facing sources of sub-

dued light can be covered with red

plexiglass to act as a safelight.Always

run a safelight test after doing this. If

paper fogs, use a double thickness of

plexiglass.

The cheapest and easiest method

of all is to paint the windows black,

but this works only if you never want

light through them.

Doors

The ultimate door is a revolving one,

but most people cannot afford the

expense. An alternate solution is a

light trap, which is inexpensive but

does require a lot of floor space. Sev-eral possible designs are shown in

Chapter 4. These entryways are

ideal, because they allow people and

air to circulate freely without light

entering the darkroom. Light traps

should not face a bright light source

because reflections can work their

way into the darkroom. If this is im-

possible to avoid, the entrance can

be covered with a hanging cloth with

a chain or weights sewn in the bot-

tom to hold it down.

Light-Proofing a Shade

Light-Proof Shade. These are perfectfor the room that must serve more thanone purpose. Release the latch and ZAP

. . he light is back in the room and theshade has disappeared. Reasonably priced,custom-made models are available fromDraper Shade Co.

Light-Proofing with Panels

LI P TO OVERLAPI ADJACENT PLNEL

HASONITEPANEL

VELCRO TAPE

Light-Proofing with Panels. Useeither one large panel or a series ofsmaller panels fastened to the wall orwindow frame with Velcro tape. This willallow for easy installation and removal.Handles on the top and bottom of eachpanel make the chore even easier.

I1 2

Page 124: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 124/201

Light-Tight Drawer or

Paper Safes

A place to store paper when the

lights are on is a real convenience. It

is time-consuming and bothersome

to work directly from the paper box,

especially when large numbers of

prints are being made. Better to

build a light-proof drawer or buy a

paper safe.

Vents, Fans, and Heaters

All equipment installed in the walls

of a darkroom should be light-tight.

Some vents and fans are made

specifically for darkroom use. If you

choose to use a regular fan, a lou-

vered box can be made to cover it

making i t light-safe. You should also

remember that some space heaters

have radiating coils that can emitsufficient light to fog paper. If you

plan to use one that emits a glow, be

sure to run the safelight test given

on page 112. If the darkroom is lo-

cated near the furnace or hot water

heater, make sure that, if they sud-

denly turn on, the light emitted

won’t fog your prints.

Light-Proof Drawer

Light-Proof Drawer. A light-proofdrawer makes the printing process agreat deal easier. The one illustrated

here has a top, sliding in grooves, thatcloses automatically when the drawer is

closed. The piece of wood on the topslide hits the pieceof wood on thebottom of the counter top and closesthe interior lid. The springs attachedbetween the drawer and the wall en-sure that the drawer closes automati-cally. All of the interior surfaces of thedrawer should be painted a f lat black toreduce reflections.

Light-Proofinga Door

Light-Proofing a Door. A light-proofdoor st i l l has to open and close. Youcan light-proof the door, and st i l l allowit t o be usable, with inexpensive

weather stripping and a rubber door-sweep available at any hardware store.

Light-Proofinga Window

Light-Proofing a Window. The

techniques used to light-proof a windowrange from painting it black (which is

hard to remove the next day), to ustlowering the shades and printing a t

night. A more flexible method is tocover the entire window with a sheet ofmasonite (or plywood) edged with feltweather stripping (or foam tape); yourroom is light-proofed, but you can easilyremove the masonite whenever youwant.

Changing Bag. Many darkrooms aresafe to prin t in but have to o much lightto load and unload film safely. The soh-tion i s t o use a changing bag that i s

completely light-proof. Film can beloaded onto developing reels and placedin a daylight tank.

Unique Solution

Because of the high cost of en-

ergy, a variety of ingenious en-

ergy-saving interior storm win-

dows are on the market. Many use

plastic channels that attach to the

window frame and hold a rigid or

flexible vinyl storm window. In

order to light-proof using these

products, you will have to locate a

light-proof, rigid or flexible vinyl

to fit the channels. Masonite will

usually fit the rigid models, and

two layers of 4 mil. garden plastic

should work with the flexible

models. These units are easy to

use and have the added benefit of

conserving energy. Most of them

are made by small companies and

a variety of types are manufac-

tured, so visit a few different

building supply stores to find out

what is available.

I I3

Page 125: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 125/201

Those Added Comforts

It’s rare that you will have a reason to

fill your sinkwith champagne bottles

as Gil Amiaga did for the opening of

his new studio. There are, however,

small things that can be added to a

darkroom to make it a more pleas-ant place to be when all of your list-

less friends are lying on the beach.

Phone

To avoid the dilemma of having to

hurry up with a print or miss a call

from your editor, an extension

phone permanently installed in the

darkroom can save time and pic-

tures. It’s also a good way to keep in

touch with the outside world whenperforming some of the more bor-

ing aspects of your work.

Heaters

Adequate heat in the darkroom isn’t

only for your comfort, but also helps

keep chemicals at the proper tem-

peratures when processing. If you

can keep the darkroom temperature

at 68°F ( 2 0 ° C ) , t greatly simplifies

temperature regulation. You need a

heater that doesn’t emit any light

that could fog your film and paper.

Radiant heaters with quartz or elec-

tric coils are out, because they light

up when in use. A large variety of

models at discount stores have con-

cealed heating elements that don’t

emit light. A built-in thermostat is

also useful, because i t will help keep

the room consistently at t he right

temperature. Be sure your heater

has a special mercury switch that au-

tomatically turns the unit off if it’s

tipped over and a three-prong

grounded plug for additional safety.

I14

Page 126: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 126/201

Floor Mats

Standing on a hard floor all day was

fine in a nineteenth-century sweat-

shop, but in a comfortable dark-

room it is definitely out. There arecommercial floor coverings, such as

Ace Core-Lite and Leedal floor mats,

made especially for the darkroom. A

piece near the enlarger and a strip

along the front of the sink will usu-

ally suffice if you don ’t want to do

the entire floor.

Stereo

A radio or extension speakers from a

good stereo will add a lot to the en-

joyment of printing.

Television

Believe it or not, there are photogra-

phers who have filters taped over

their television sets so they can watch

the football game while printing.

They have a tendency to get their

zone systems confused with zone de-

fenses, but that’s one of the hazards

of doing two things at the same time.

Photographby Gil Amiaga.

I 15

Page 127: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 127/201

7 Processing Equipment

Page 128: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 128/201

Contents

Sinks

Water Quality

Temperature R egulation

Automatic Temperature

ProcessingTrays and TongsWet-Side Accessories

Roll FilmTan ks and Reels

Washers

Timing Systems

Chemical S torage and Was te

Disposal

Regulation

Page 129: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 129/201

Sinks

Most beginning photographers start

by putting trays of chemicals on the

kitchen table or counters. They soon

learn that spills are impossible to

avoid and temperatures in the trays

difficult to hold a t a constant level.In addition, the cleanup time is

longer than need be because of the

care with which the counters and ta-

bles have to be cleaned. The solu-

tion is a sink large enough to hold all

of the processing trays. Photo-

graphic sinks should have a large

area and a shallow depth. They can

be equipped with temperature con-

trol faucets, standpipes, and duck-

boards to make them even more ef-

ficient. You can build your own of

wood, as shown in Chapter 6, but

commercial models are available

that are perfect for the home dark-

room.

Commercial sinks come in either

plastic or stainless steel models.

Stainless is extremely long-lasting

but much more expensive. Stainless

sinks also tend to be a little noisy

with trays and tongs banging against

them, but their durability and ease

of cleaning make them a dream to

use. Plastic sinks are equally efficient

at keeping the spills contained, are

easy to clean, and, given reasonable

care, should outlast even the

youngest photographer. Sinks can

be ordered from suppliers either

with o r without stands. The stands

make them portable if you are mov-

ing. They can also be built in without

using the stand, but in doing so you

are making it much more difficult to

remove and install in another loca-

tion. Be sure the stand is made of a

corrosion-proof material or is wellpainted; the chemicals used in pho-

tography will badly corrode most

steel stands, and rust scaling will de-

tract from the cleanliness and ap-

pearance of the room.

Stainless Steel Darkroom. This Calumet darkroom setup illustrates equipmentfor a high-volume operation. The sinks provide for bulk-processing of film and printsand have all of the best possible features, including emperature regulation, gaseousburst agitation, stainless steel construction, and daylight tanks.

Sink with Ribbed Bottom. This NuArc plastic sink features the dump trough inthe back and a ribbed bot tom making duckboards unnecessary. A simple straightfor-ward design.

I18

Page 130: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 130/201

Arkay Sink. This Arkay sink is represen-tative of the many well-designed stainlesssteel sinks available commercially. The keyfeatures are the high splashboard and therounded corners in the sink that make forfast and easy cleaning. This illustration alsoshows a standpipe inserted. When thesink is filled, the water rises only to thetop of the standpipe and then overflowsinto it and down the drain. A number ofstandpipes of different heights allow youto fill the sink to different levels, depend-ing on what is in the water bath. Trayswould need a low level of water t o keepthem regulated, but developing tankscould use a higher level.

Plastic Sinks. This ABS plastic sink byNuArc has a unique design that allows youto dump chemicals without affecting thetemperature bath for processing rays.The trough running along the back of thesink is connected to a fast-emptying drain.The sink also features a ribbed bottomthat allows water to circulate freely underthe tray for more efficient temperaturecontrol. It comes equipped with a built-inviewing area that doubles as a light tableand squeegee board-ideal for thoseworking with large negatives or graphic

arts materials.Note the sink sprayer that makes

cleaning up easy. This device can be in-stalled on any sink, including one you buildyourself.

Sink Accessories. When building orbuyinga sink, there are several accessoryitems that can be considered. The illustra-tion here shows a knee-operated mixingvalve from Eljer that allows you to mix thewater at any temperature you desire usingyour knee, which leaves your hands freeto hold the processing rays, film, orwhatever. The high faucet is ideal, becauseit allows for the placement of large gradu-ates and bottles under it for filling. Thefaucet with the rubber hose attached doesthe same thing and also eliminates noisydrips, since it lies on the bottom of thesink when not in use, and any water com-

The illustration of the drain and standpipeshows how it is assembled.

Foot-Operated Kohler makes a

foot-operated control valve that allowsyou to vary the temperature of the waterflow while keeping your hands free. De-

used in the darkroom.

ing Out 'lips quietly Onto the sink bottom.signed or hospital work, it can alsoe

Courtesy Eljer Plumbingware

I 9

Page 131: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 131/201

Water Quality

Water quality in this section refers to

everything but its temperature,

which is discussed in the next sec-

tion on temperature regulation.

There are several basic components

that affect the quality of water usedin photography.

Suspended Solids

These small, solid particles exist in

all water systems. They originate at

the source, or enter into the water at

some point in the distribution sys-

tem, and can be removed by using

water filters. Their removal becomes

increasingly important if you areusing a temperature-regulating valve

that can be damaged by solid parti-

cles in the water.

Although these particles have rel-

atively little effect on prints, they

have a tendency to adhere to nega-

tives, and once they have dried to

the surface, it is impossible to re-

move them.

Water impurities

Hard and Soft Water

Hard water can make chemical mix-

ing difficult, and soft water can

soften the gelatin on film and paper

after long washing cycles. Th e rangeof allowable hardness of water is

from 40 o 150parts of calcium car-

bonate (CaCO,) per million. To find

out the range of your own supply,

call the local water authority.

Purity

Only a very expensive filtration sys-tem can remove anything but sus-

pended particles. For badly polluted

sources, one solution is to use dis-

tilled water, at least for washing the

negatives. You can store water that

runs off of the air conditioner or de-

humidifier cooling coils. Because of

concern with water quality, it is pos-

sible to buy very inexpensive dis-

tilled water at your local market.

This water is sometimes labeled in-

fant or baby water. However, if there

is plain distilled water, it is the same

thing and a bit less expensive.

If you are using water from a source other than a municipal water supply, you

should have it analyzed by a lab to determine its contents. The following table

gives some of the maximum allowable limits for commonly encountered

chemicals.

PracticalLimits for Common Impurities in Water Used for

Photographic Processing

Impun'ty Maximum or Range or Content (pjnn*)

Color and suspended matter

Dissolved solids

Silica

Hardness, as calcium carbonate

Copper, iron, manganese (each)

Chlorine, as free hypochlorous acid

Chloride (for black-and-white reversal)

Chloride (for color processing)

Bicarbonate

Sulfate

Sulfide

PH

None

250

20

7.0 to 8.5

40 (preferable) to 150

0.1

225

100

150

200

0.1

*parts per million 0 Eastman Kodak Company 1967,1974

Air in the Water

Air in water and solutions causes

bubbles to build up on film and

paper surfaces, preventing develop-

ers and other chemicals from com-ing in contact. This should be pre-

vented if uniform development,

fixing, toning, and washing is to be

achieved. Either boil the water to

drive off the air, or add an aerator to

the incoming line. The aerator

forces large bubbles into the water,

and these combine with and remove

the smaller ones before rising to the

surface.

When stirring chemicals, it also

helps to use a stirring paddle with a

wide blade and narrow handle. Th enarrow handle disturbs the surface

of the solution less than a larger ob-

jec t would and prevents additional

air from entering. Some chemical

mixers are designed to go one step

further and are magnetically oper-

ated paddles without handles so very

little surface disturbance occurs.

Page 132: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 132/201

Water Filter. Filters are rated by the

size of the particles that they removefrom the water. The largest filter youshould use for photographic processingis 50 micrometers. A smaller f i l ter willmake the water cleaner and the filterdirtier, requiring more filter changeswithout noticeable effect on your nega-tives or prints.

Water filters come in cold or hotmodels. The basic difference is theirrespective ability to resist temperaturedamage. The hot-line fi lter is usuallydesigned to withstand high temperatureand pressure over a sustained period of

time. The cold filters are not subjectedto this stress, so their quality (andprice) is not as high.

This illustration shows a Leedalmodel and the f i l ter element inside.

121

Page 133: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 133/201

Page 134: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 134/201

Recirculating Heater. The basicapplication of a recirculator is to keepthe water at a constant temperaturewithout adding any new water t o thesystem. This conserves water (however,it consumes electricity), because thetemperature of the water in a waterbath can be raised without adding newhot water. The recirculator pumps thewater out of the sink or bath, heats it,

and then returns it at the preselectedtemperature. Look for the rated capac-

ity of the recirculator in terms of bothflow rate (gallons per minute) and tem-perature range. It's also helpful t o knowwhat i t s range is in relation to the ambi-ent temperature of the room. Can it

hold 68" on a minus 32" day in yournorthern Maine darkroom?

Immersion Heaters. The least ex-pensive way to control temperature in afixed body of solution is with an immer-sion heater. They work on the sameprinciple as electric probes used to heata cup of coffee. The electricity raisesthe temperature of the heating elementand that heats the water. Some immer-sion heaters are quite sophisticated,with thermostatic controls and circulat-ing pumps, so the temperature is main-

tained uniformly throughout the solu-tion. Without adequate circulation, thetemperature would be uneven.

Stainless Steel Graduates. Stainlesssteel graduates are great conductors ofheat and can be used for raising orlowering the temperature of solutionsplaced in them. Immerse the graduate ina water bath at the desired tempera-ture, or do what Neal Slavin does anduse a hot plate to bring the temperatureup quickly.

Therm omete r in Fitting. If you

don't go al l the way with temperatureregulation, i t 's a t least helpful not tohave to hold the thermometer in thestream of water with one hand whiletrying to adjusttwo aucets with theother. The solution is a fitting into

which a thermometer is permanentlymounted. You sti l l have to regulate thetemperature manually, but at least youcan check the temperature withoutstanding there holding the thermome-te r . This model is by Pfefer.

Wat er Bath. One way to maintain a water bath requires a heating element, a tem-perature-control device, and a circulating pump. The pump is necessary to ensureevenness of temperature throughout the solution. This model has all of these ele-ments combined into one and can maintain the water within one-tenth of a degree ofthe preset temperature.

I2 3

Page 135: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 135/201

Automatic Temperature Regulation

For photographers w h o s pe nd a

great deal of time in the darkroom,

one of the main p roblems is regulat-

ing the temperature of the water

flow int o water baths and print and

negative washers. It is a great luxuryto be able to avoid constantly moni-

toring and adjus ting the tempera-

ture of the incoming water. Manu-

facturers have developed a number

of units that reduce or remove this

onerous chore; this section illus-

trates and describes some of the

most popular ones.

MeasuringYour Outlet’s

Flow Rate

When it comes time to order the

temperature regulator for your

sink you will have to specify the

flow rate at which the tempera-

ture-regulating valve will nor-

mally operate. This allows the

supplier to install a collar tha t will

allow you to use the temperature-

regulating valve without having

the water on full force. Measuring

the flow rate is a simple matter.

Find a fivegallon can and con-

nect it to a sink outlet with a rub-

ber hose. Turn the water on at

the flow rate you intend to use.

Time how long it takes for the

fivegallon can to fill. Divide that

time by 5 and you will have the

gallons-per-minute flow rate you

will be using.

The flow rate will vary season-

ally, with the lowest rate likely to

occur in the hot summer months

when neighbors are watering

their lawns and filling their pools.

This should be taken into consid-

eration when measuring the rate

of flow.

Thermostatic Valve. Thermo static mixing valves wo rk b y the same basic principle

on which the therm ostat in a home heating system works. Wh en th e wate r tempera-

ture in the outflow drops, the supply of ho t water is increased and vice versa. M ost

valves w or k best at o r near their highest rated flow capacity. Be sure that you do n o t

buy one that is always operating at the lowe r lim it for w hich it was designed. The con-

venience of these devices comes from setting the required temperature only once and

then having the valve h old it automatically, freeing your hands and mind for other things.

Mos t well-made units have a vacuum breaker that prevents the siphonage o f wa ter

back int o th e wate r supply system. In m any areas this is required by building codes.

Because most units operate best a t their maximum rated capacity, it’s important that

you determine the flow rates you w ill be dealing wi th and notify the com pany fro m

which you are buying what range you expect fro m the ir valve. F or m ost hom e dark-

rooms, a flow rate from 112 t o 2 gallons per minute will suffice for all operations, in-

cluding washing.

I24

Page 136: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 136/201

Water Chiller. In some areas o f the

country, at certain times o f the year, the

incoming cold wate r is at a higher tem-

perature than the da rkroom requires.

Mo st photographers grin and bear it,b u t

the mo re affluent consider the installa-

t ion of a water-chilling unit.

sufficient difference be&een ho t and

cold supply lines to operate accurately.So if you are co nsidering installing one o f

these valves in areas of th e co un try

where the cold water is above 60°, yo u

may find that th e m ixing valve will n ot

wo rk with out the installation of a water

chil ler . Check this w ith bot h your water

department (they can tell you the highest

temperature to expect) and the manufac-

tu re r of he valve and chilling u n it This

unit i s fr om California Stainless.

A thermostatic mixing valve requires a

I25

Page 137: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 137/201

Processing Trays and Tongs

Trays

It’s been said that all Edward Weston

had in his darkroom were a light-

bulb, a printing frame, and three

wooden developing trays. This indi-cates either the importance of trays

or the lack of importance of every-

thing else. The primary function of

trays is to hold chemicals, but varia-

tions in design, materials, and pur-

pose do affect, slightly, the useful-

ness of the various models.

The trays should be deep enough

to prevent unwanted overflow when

agitating the tray full of chemicals.

And they should be large enough to

handle a print easily, either by hand

or by tongs, without trapping theprint between sides that are too

close together. Ribs on the bottom

reinforce the tray and also make

picking up prints easier.

Inexpensive trays can be too small

to hold the sized prints for which

they are marked. Rather than buy a

more expensive tray, however, you

can buy the larger size of the less ex-

pensive one a nd save some money.

A tray should be rigid enough so

that you can lift it when full of chem-

icals without it bending under theweight and spilling chemicals. Try

flexing the tray by holding the cor-

ners and twisting. If there is too

much flex, buy another model.

To reduce the possibility of tray

contamination, label the trays for

developer, stop bath, and fixer and

then use the same tray for each

chemical every time. Use entirely

separate trays for such things as ton-

ing solutions.

Leedal Tray Rack. A great deal ofspace can be saved by using a tray rackthat holds trays one on top of theother. If you are concerned about possi-ble contamination from chemicalssplashing from one tray to another as a

result of this arrangement, use the trayrack to hold two fixing trays and thewater holding tray. This way contamina-tion, should it occur, will have no effecton the prints. The prints should alwaysprogress from the top down to reducethe danger of contamination. If you haveto use developer, stop bath, and fixer inthe rack, put the developer on top, thenstop bath, with the fixer on the bottomlevel. This Leedal model is made of

stainless steel. A somewhat less expen-sive, but well designed, model is avail-able from Richard.

Deep Hypo Tray. There is a ten-dency for prints to back up in the hypotray, and the added agitation requiredmakes it desirable to have a deeper traythan is needed for development orstopping. This problem has been solved

by trays such as the Arkay deep hypotray.

Plastic Print Trays. These Patersontrays are typical of high-quality plastictrays that are perfectly suitable fordarkroom purposes. The pouring lipmakes pouring the chemicals back intothe bottle or down thesink mucheasier.

I26

Page 138: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 138/201

Print Drums. Print drums were ini-tially designed t o allow development ofcolor prints in a well-lit room. They alsohave the advantage of requiring asmaller quantity of chemicals t o get thejob done. Drum agitators are availableto keep the solutions moving, makingthe entire development process easier.These drums are also available in largersizes for mural processing. They areoften used for color printing, becausesafelights generally cannot be used andit’s easier to develop the pr int in a drumthan in the dark. Wi th black and whiteprinting, however, drums remove theexcitement of seeing the print emergingfrom the white paper.

Print Tongs. Print tongs are gianttweezers that allow you t o agitate andremove prints from processing rayswithout using your fingers. They reducecontamination and keep your fingers

clean, so that the next time you changea negative in the enlarger you don’t ruinit with fixer. A good print tong shouldhold the pr int securely but not at theexpense of damaging the emulsion.Plastic tongs are usually the best: theycombine cleanability and holding power.Ifyou buy tongs with rubber tips thatare subject to contamination, markthem t o indicate which is for developer,stop bath, and fixer.

I27

Page 139: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 139/201

Wet-Side Accessories

Just as the kitchen of a good French

chef is made more enjoyable and

more productive as a result of high-

quality and useful accessories, so is

the darkroom. Not having a gradu-

ate large enough to mix a solution,or a stirring rod long enough to keep

your hands out of the solution when

mixing, are frustrations that can and

should be avoided. These pages de-

scribe some of the accessories that

are available and what questions to

consider when buying them.

Stirring Rods. Stirring rods are usefulwhen mixing powdered o r liquid chemi-cals. They are usually designed with nar-ro w handles and larger blades on thebottom. The narrow handles reduce theamount of disturbance at the surface,preventing air from entering the solution.The blades increase the agitation belowthe surface and are available in a widerange of styles, including ones with holesand others with heads that can be usedfor crushing powdered chemicals.

When buying a paddle, make sure thatthe handle is long enough to provide youwith a grip when fully immersed in thelargest mixing container you use.

Funnel. A funnel is almost a necessity if

you want t o pour chemicals from a largegraduate into a bottle with a narrow neck.Two funnels are handy to have becauseyou can mix your chemicals right in thestorage bottle using one funnel t o pour inthe dry powder and the other to pour inthe water. Funnels are usually cheaper inthe hardware store than in the camerastore and serve the same function.

Illustration courtesy of Nalge Company, Divi-

sion of Sybron Corporat ion

Towels. It helps to have towels t o wipeyour hands and to clean up spilled chemi-cals. The least expensive method is to usepaper towels, but occasionally it helps tohave some that are lint-free. Photowipes,

made by the Photo Materials Co., arehandy t o have around. They are too ex-pensive t o clean the floor with, but arevery convenient for equipment.

Aprons. When mixing chemicals it

doesn’t take much of a slip t o spill themon your clothes. To be on the safe side, it

might be worthwhile to have a vinyl apronhandy. They only cost a few dollars andcan save their purchase price in ruinedclothes. This apron is from BelArt; EPOl

and Kodak have similar models.

Graduates. Graduates are containerswith scales marked on thei r side, used formixing, holding, and measuring chemicals.Every well-equipped darkroom shouldhave a variety available. The basic graduatecomes in either plastic or stainless steel.The stainless is much more expensive, butit is useful for temperature regulation.

Because stainless steel is a greater con-ductor of heat, you can raise or lower thetemperature of chemicals quickly by pour-ing them into the graduate and immersingthe graduate in either hot or cold wateras the situation requires. The same effectcan be achieved with a plastic graduate,although it takes longer.

A tall, thin graduate is also useful fo rmeasuring small quantities of chemicals.Trying to measure I ounce of stop bathconcentrate to mix with I gallon of wateris very difficult with a large, wide graduate.

I2 8

Page 140: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 140/201

Thermometers

Thermometers can be divided into

classes based on the principles by

which they operate. Your selection

should be based on accuracy, cost,

and durability.

Liquid in Glass. This type is identical

in principle to the thermometers

that we take our own temperatureswith. It consists of a bulb full of a

fluid, usually alcohol, and a long

narrow tube marked in degrees. As

the fluid heats or cools, it either ex-

pands or contracts.

These thermometers are ex-

tremely accurate, relatively fast-act-

ing and long-lasting-if you do n' t

break them. If the thermometer

overheats, you may break the tube.

To work accurately, the entire col-

umn of liquid that indicates the tem-

perature should be immersed in theliquid you are measuring.

Glass Thermometer. This glass tubeKodak thermometer is fast-acting andreliable. It is a little slippery t o grip with

wet hands, so handle it carefully. As asafety precaution, wrap a rubber bandaround the end to provide you with abetter grip. It will also help prevent it

from rolling off the counter. Ifyou jar aglass thermometer, you will sometimesfind that an air bubble has entered thecolumn of alcohol. If this happens, you canheat the thermometer gradually unti l thecolumn is filled entirely with alcohol.When it cools,the column will usually berejoined. Overheating, even a little, willpop the top off the glass tube. This modelhas a range from 30" o 120°F.

Courtesy Eastman Kodak Company

Liquid in Glass with Metal Backing.

Some thermometers are reinforced

with a metal backing to prevent

them from rolling or breaking as

easily. These are ideal for tray ther-

mometers, but if the scale is on the

backing and not on the tube itself,

the thermometer can get out of reg-

ister and indicate the incorrect tem-

perature.

Dial Thermometer: These thermome-

ters have large dial faces that are

very easy to read. T he needle moves

because of the expansion or contrac-

tion of a bi-metallic strip. These ther-

mometers are also quite accurate

and durable but, because of their

mechanical nature, are more sensi-

tive to physical abuse. If a glass ther-

mometer breaks you will know it, but

if one of these does you may not.

The dial face is also prone to leak-

ing, because the seal between theglass and metal case will not last for-

ever. Occasionally calibrate them by

comparing with a thermometer that

is known to be accurate.

Electronic Thermometers. These ther-

mometers are available with digital

readouts and even audible ones. It is

sometimes difficult to read the tem-

perature on a glass or dial ther-

mometer because of parallax and

the small numbering on the ther-

mometer itself. This problem iseliminated with the digital ther-

mometer that gives you a direct nu-

merical readout of the temperature.

However, they are sensitive to me-

chanical damage a nd moisture be-

cause of their electronic nature.

Tray Thermometer. This Kodak traythermometer is typical of those made t obe left immersed n developer trays forquick and easy monitoring of the solu-tion's temperature. Be gentle with ther-mometers such as this, because the scaleis not on the glass tube itself. If the tube is

slid up or down in the metal case, it willread an incorrect temperature.

Courtesy Eastman Kodak Company

Dial Thermometer. The advantageof adial thermometer such as this Kodakmodel is that it is extremely easy to read.The light wil l not be defracted, as it can bewith a glass thermometer. In some modelsa mirror is used to reflect the needle, andwhen the needle and its image are seen inperfect alignment, viewing parallax has

been eliminated. This ensures that youread the correct temperature by showingYOU the correct viewing angle.

Kodak Glass with Metal Backing

Thermometer. This glass thermometeris longer lasting becauseit is attached to ametal backing hat provides support for Courtesy Eastman Companythe glass tube.

Courtesy Eastman Kodak Company

I2 9

Page 141: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 141/201

Roll FiImTanks and Reels

Photographers using 35mm or 2 1/4

format film are confronted with the

difficultiesof developing a long strip

of film. Th e most common solution

is to coil it on a reel so that there is

sufficient space between the sur-faces to allow for the circulation of

chemicals, but not so much that the

coil occupies a large space. This

basic principle is packaged today in

three variations: stainless steel tanks

and reels, plastic tanks and reels,

and a combination of stainless steel

tanks with plastic tops. Traditionally,

most pros have used the all-stainless-

steel tanks and reels because they

perform extremely well and last al-

most forever. However, one problem

is that they may leak around the top

if the tank is inverted during agita-

tion. This difficulty has been solved

by marrying a plastic top to the stain-

less steel tank. The seal is tighter and

less susceptible to leaks. Many pho-

tographers use the all-plastic tank

and reel, which has the advantage of

a reel that can be widened or nar-

rowed depending on the film format

you happen to be using. With the

stainless steel reels, you will need a

set for each format you shoot.Stainless steel tanks will lose or

gain he at more quickly because of

the conductivity of stainless steel, so

if the room is a good deal hotter or

colder than the chemical solution,

use either a water bath or change to

plastic tanks that will act as an insu-

lator.

Stainless Steel Tanks. These stain-less steel tanks from Burleigh Brooksare representative of what most pho-tographers tend t o use. They are well-made and durable. Some reels by othermanufacturers have different catches fo rthe end of the film, and some of thesedesigns work better than others. It’s

best to take a piece of film with youwhen you buy to see how easy it is toinsert and how well it is held.

The long rod s used to raise andlower the reels. Always buy enoughreels to fill the tank and use them all ifyou are developing one rol l of film andyou agitate by inverting the tank. If onereel slides up and down the tank, devel-opment will be affected because of theincreased agitation.

Plastic Reels. This Paterson plasticreel shows the mechanism by which it

can be widened or narrowed t o accom-modate different film formats. The small

bearing on the right is part of the self-loading device that makes these reels

extremely easy t o load just by turningthe sides back and forth.

Film-Developing Tanks. PatersonSuper System 4 is representative of themany film-developing anks on the mar-ket. It s unbreakable, fast-filling, andcomes in a variety of sizes.

I30

Page 142: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 142/201

72-Exposure Reels. The introductionof 72-exposure film cassettes has led tothe manufacture of developing reelscapable of handling hese longer lengthsof film. llford makes a reel for these filmlengths that f i t s into a standard develop-ment tank.

Film Cartridge Openers. If you havea I954 Ford convertible, you might beable to find a “church key” in the trunkor under the back seat. It will work finefor opening 35mm cassettes. Ifyou want

to step up, you can buy something ikethis Nikor cassette opener. Kodak alsosupplies openers for I I0 and I26 car-

tridges.

Daylight Tank for Sheet Film. Jobosheet film reels and film loaders providea daylight tank system for large formatwork. The film loader holds the sheetfilm reel on a flat base. The film guidepermits easy insertion of each sheetinto a separate groove-without crimp-ing, binding, or scratching. As the reel

rotates, each groove clicks into positionfor positive film loading.

Each reel holds 6 sheets of 4 x 5 ilm.

Two reels can be used with the tank t omake roomlight processing of up to I 2sheets of film as convenient as process-ing roll film. Also, this economical day-light system uses only half of the chem-istry required for processing nhard-rubber tanks.

Daylight Developing Tank. There’snothing new about using a daylightdeveloping tank. Any tank, once loaded,can be used in normal room lighting.But the Jobo #2400 tank does more. It

allows you not only to develop yourfilm in daylight, but t o load it in daylight,

too. Yo u can also load and developpartly exposed film in this tank; yousimply load and develop the exposedpart in full daylight, then cut the film andput the unexposed por tion back intothe camera.

Automatic Film Loader

Automatic Film Loader. Loadingstainless steel reels requires the devel-

opment of a “feel” for when the film is

reeled up correctly. This takes practice,and you cannot let the f i r s t fewattempts discourage you. I f you want totry a more mechanical (but not neces-sarily more effective) method, you canbuy automatic film loaders.

131

Page 143: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 143/201

Page 144: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 144/201

Revolving Drum. This Arkay Loadmas-ter washer is typical of washers using arevolving drum. A gate in the drum is

opened and the pr ints are placed inside.The jet of water entering the washer actslike a millrace and the drum revolves likea water wheel. The level of water nevercompletely

drum revolves,he printsend to becomedislodged when they reach the surface of

the water, ensuring that they do not stickto the drum and wash unevenly. Thesewashersare effective but can me-

chanical damage to prints, such as bentcorners, and so on. A similar design is

available from Pako.

Built-in Washer. The Paterson filmdeveloping tanks are designed with a built-in washer. The hose is connected at oneend to the top Of the washer andat the

other t o the faucet. The water entersfrom the bo ttom of the tank and leavesfrom the top, taking the chemicals with it.

the drum, soas the

Tray Siphon. Kodak makes a very efficient tray washer that also contains a siphon. Thedesign assures that the heavier chemicals that tend to accumulate on the bottom of thetray are removed by the siphoning effect. If you were to place a hose in a tray and expectthe water flow t o lift the chemicals over the rim, the washing times should be greatlyincreased. This siphon l i f ts the water from the bottom of the tray, reducing the timeneeded for washing well.

To be washed effectively, prints should be placed in a tray twice their size. This allowsthe water coming from the siphon to spin the prints and gives them much needed agitation.

Courtesy Eastman Kodak Company

I 3 3

Page 145: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 145/201

Timing Systems

Electronic sophistication is affecting

traditional darkroom equipment

primarily in the design of exposure

meters and timers. In most cases, the

absolute accuracy of many of the

newer units is not necessary; what isnecessary is that your timer repeat

each timing cycle exactly the same as

every other. If the timer takes 65 sec-

onds to indicate a minute, that’s

okay, as long as it does it every time.

Th e only exception to this rule is

when you are workingwith color ma-

terials that are much more sensitive

to the absolute timing of processes.

Timers can be broken down into

two main classes, mechanical and

electric. Mechanical timers are oper-

ated by winding a spring; electrical

timers require a source of energy

from either a wall outlet o r a battery.

Electric timers can use e ither motors

or transistors. Electronic timers will

often have a digital readout.

The old standby in most dark-

rooms is the Gralab timer, which is

used for timing everything from de-

velopment, to printing, to making

coffee. Its timing range from 1 sec-

ond to 1 hour makes it useful for

timing many activities. Many of the

newer timers now on the market are

designed for specific purposes and

should be used only for those for

which they are designed.

General Timers

For a timer to be useful for all dark-

room activities, it must accurately

measure short intervals in printing

exposures and longer intervals in

film development. I t is also helpful if

the dial is large and glows in thedark. If it is to be used as a general

timer, it should also have some of

the best features of enlarging timers,

such as electrical switching capabil-

ity and repeatability.

EnlargingTimers

When making enlargements, you

need a timer that is extremely accu-

rate in the range of approximately 5

seconds to 1 minute (or longer forcolor pri nting ). Th e timer should

also have the capability of turning

off the enlarger at the end of the

preselected timing cycle. It is also

convenient to have a reset device

that allows you to repeat a preset pe-

riod of time. This is especially help-

ful when making a large number of

identical exposures, such as proof-

sheets. A luxury is to have the timer

programmable so that it stops and

starts at different intervals during its

cycle, allowing you to time a varietyof continuous activities without hav-

ing to reset the clock for each step

Gralab Timer. For practical timing of

both development and enlarging, thereisn’t anything quite like the Gralab

timer. This timer is probably the mostused timer in the field, and although it

isn’t digital or electronic, it’s proven andit works well.

It has a large dial, it glows in thedark, and it has a timing range from I

second to 60 minutes. It also has a

circuit to turn off the enlarger a t theend of the preset cycle.

I34

Page 146: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 146/201

Mechanical Timer. Humble?Yes, butyou can st i l l develop your film when theelectricity is out. Kodak st i l l makes thisversatile mechanical clock with a timingrange of I second to 60 minutes. It hasboth minute and second hands and aswitch allows you t o stop the timer and

reset without resetting the hands.

Courtesy Eastman Kodak Company

Footswitch. A footswitch t o turn theenlarger on and off is handy when, forexample, you’re confronted with a 10-

second exposure in which you have tododge or burn for 8 seconds. By press-ing the switch with your foot, itwillturn on the enlarger and leave yourhands free t o do other things.

Digital Timer. The advantage of adigital timer is theenlarger times that are accurate andrepeatable. This timer shows theamount of time that has elapsed, afeature that is handy when burning ordodging.

to have short

Multi Timer. This unit allows thetiming of several operations at once-ideal for those who need to keep trackof more than one thing at a time. Thememory feature allows you t o storetimes that are used repeatedly.

Mechanical Enlarging Timer. ThisOmega 60-second timer is an excellent

example of a relatively inexpensivemechanical timer. The electric cordprovides power to the enlarger whenthe clock is switched into i t s timinginterval.

I35

Page 147: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 147/201

Chemical Storage andWaste Disposal

Chemical Storage

Storing chemicals is really a two-part

problem. The simpler problem is

where to store unmixed chemicals

such as developer o r fixer. An easysolution is to keep them in a storage

cabinet somewhere outside of the

darkroom, which will protect boxed

or half-used containers from the

high humidity. The more difficult

problem involves storing mixed

chemicals. If you are a prodigious

photographer a nd process through

developer, stop bath, fixer #1, fixer

#2, hypoclearing agent, and toning,

as well as negative developers, wet-

ting agents, and possibly color-pho-

tography chemicals, storage ofmixed chemicals can be a trouble-

some matter. The basic rules that

should be considered when plan-

ning for mixed chemical storage are:

1. The chemicals should be

stored in containers that do not

react with their contents.

2. The chemicals should be

stored conveniently near where they

are used, such as a shelf over the

sink.

3. They should be accessible. Ifyou mix in large quantities for econ-

omy or because you use a lot, it’s eas-

ier to plan on containers with spigots

than it is to lift 5-gallon containers

every half hour.

4. Containers should be airtight

and preferably have a system to keep

all air away from the surface of the

chemicals. When air interacts with

chemicals, it oxidizes them-an un-

desirable effect-so the less surface

exposed to the air the longer your

chemicals will last. The two best

techniques for accomplishing this

are containers that collapse as solu-

tion is removed, which keeps the air

out, or floating lids for rigid storage

containers.

5. The bottles for the chemicals

should be opaque or amber colored,

because light speeds the degrada-

tion of the chemicals.

Storage Containers. These Falconchemical containers have become the

standard in the field. They are wellmade, durable, and have a convenientlabeling system that allows you t o iden-tity the chemical, the date it was mixed,and any other pertinent information.

Bulk Storage. Large quantities ofmixed chemicalscan be stored in plastic

storage tanks. To make Sure they are

stored properly, use a tank with a float-ing lid. This lid prevents air f rom comingin contact with the stored chemical andweakening it. If the tank is more than I

gallon, it is almost a necessity to have a

spigot with which to draw off chemicals.These tanks are good examples of bulkchemical storage tanks. Kodak makesbulk storage tanks with floating lids in

7-, 14-, 30-, and 55-gallon sizes.

Courtesy Eastman Kodak Company

Air Evacuation Bottle. Falcon hasalso developed a way t o keep chemicalsat top form longer. These bottles allowyou t o squeeze the air out, thus pro-longing the life of the chemicals bykeeping air f rom contacting the surface.

I36

Page 148: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 148/201

Waste Disposal

Because darkroom work by its very

nature produces waste products, the

photographer should be aware of

the nature of these products and

what can be done to minimize their

impact on the environment.

The factors affecting waste man-

agement are volume of effluent (the

waste flowing out of the darkroom),

temperature of effluent, types of

chemicals used, and the ratio of

chemical waste to wash water. The ef-

fluent from personal darkrooms is

within most established sewer codes.

The pH (measure of relative acidity

or alkalinity of a liquid) is between

6.5 and 9, the temperature is less

than go", an d there are very few sus-

pended solids. Most commercially

available processing solutions con-

tain no grease or oils, nothing flam-mable or explosive, and they do not

have much color or odor. Photo-

graphic chemicals are generally

biodegradable and will not harm

municipally run biological treat-

men t systems. It is not advisable to

discharge photographic wastes di-

rectly into a septic tank and/or

leach field, unless the amount is

small in comparison to domestic dis-

charge volumes or has been greatly

diluted.

Many states require the installa-tion of a back-flow prevention valve

in the inlet water supply of the dark-

room. The valve prevents chemicals

from being sucked back into the do-

mestic water supply if a vacuum is ac-

cidentally created in the municipal

system.

The silver in the waste water is in

the form of soluble silver thiosulfate

from the fixing bath. It is not in the

form of toxic, free-ion silver. The

thiosulfate is converted by munici-

pal processing plants into insoluble

silver sulfide and some metallic sil-

ver. These are removed with other

solids during clarification.

Recycling

Since the earth and its resources are

finite, photographic chemicals

should be conserved whenever pos-

sible. The use of replenishers in-

stead of one-shot chemistry is ad-

vised where feasible. The main

darkroom chemical that is recycled

is silver. It can be removed from fix-

ing baths by several methods-

metallic replacement, electrolytic re-

covery, and ion exchange. For

larger, commercial darkrooms with

high flow rates, electrolytic or ion

exchange are economically reason-

able. For personal darkrooms with

much lower flow rates, metallic ex-

change makes the most sense.

Metallic exchange is a very simple

process in which a more active metal

than silver (usually iron) replaces

the silver and goes into solution.The insoluble silver metal settles out

as a solid. There are several com-

mercially available systems on the

market. Photographers can make

their own by placing steel wool in a

drum and pouring the fixing bath

into it. The silver will form a sludge

in the bottom. This sludge is sold or

given to a recycling company that re-

covers the silver. The silver content

of the sludge is hard to determine,

so most companies will not pay for it.

They pick it up for free and makewhat profit they can. Even though

the photographer receives no mone-

tary compensation, the feeling of

having made an effort to help the

environment is payment enough.

I37

Page 149: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 149/201

8 Enlarging Equipment

Page 150: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 150/201

Contents

En arge s

Enlarging Lenses

Easels

Focusing MagnifiersNegative Cleaning and Dusting

Printing and E xposure

Negative Storage and Proof

Controls

Printers

Page 151: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 151/201

En arge s

The wide array of enlargers on the

market is confusing to the prospec-

tive buyer because the criteria for se-

lection are somewhat obscure. What

separates a $150 enlarger from one

that costs $2,000? Is the additionalexpenditure worthwhile and , most

importantly, will it show in the prints

themselves?

The most important elements in

a black-and-white enlarger are that it

be steady, optically aligned, and have

a first-rate enlarging lens. The next

most important criteria are the char-

acteristics of the light source. This is

secondary only because its choice is

as much aesthetic as practical. Al-

most all other criteria for enlarger

selection fall outside of the area of

necessity into the area of conve-

nience and comfort. Let’s take a

look at these criteria.

Steadiness. If an enlarger moves in

any direction while an exposure is

being made, the movement will de-

crease the quality of the print. The

edges will lose definition and the

overall sharpness of the image will

be degraded. In many cases, the ef-

fects are wrongly attributed to the

film, camera, o r enlarger lens. En-larger design certainly affects how

steady the system is at the time of the

exposure, but any enlarger, even a

heavy-duty one already securely at-

tached to a sturdy stand, can be

made more solid by providing addi-

tional support for the top of the col-

umn. The steadiness of some enlarg-

ers is improved by wall mounting

(see page 107).

AZignment.It is essential that the lens,

negative, and printing surface be inperfect alignment to avoid image

distortion, unevenness of illumina-

tion, and variations in focus from

corner to corner.

Quality of Lens. This is probably the

single most important element in

any enlarging system, an d is covered

in detail in the section called “En-

larging Lenses” (see pages 144145).

With enough time and patience, al-

most every other enlarger shortcom-

ing can be overcome, but there is

nothing you can do about this ele-

ment except make sure you have the

best or buy another lens. In manycases, the lenses that come with an

enlarger are inexpensive and are

thrown in as part of a package deal.

With camera optics being what they

are today, almost any camera will

outperform a cheap enlarger lens.

This means that what you are getting

on the negative is not what you are

getting on the print. If possible, al-

ways buy the enlarger without the

lens, or try to get a package price

with a good lens substituted for the

one that comes with the enlarger.

Lig ht Source. The type of bulb used in

an enlarger is relatively unimportant

in black-and-white printing, but it

becomes critical for color work.

There are three major types of bulbs

in use today:

1. Tungsten. These bulbs have

been around for a long time and are

perfectly suitable for black-and-

white printing. They are less suitable

for color work because they tend to

degrade in intensity over their life

span and change color balance.

2. Quartz-halogen. These bulbs are

used in color enlargers because they

have a steady output throughout

their life cycle and do not develop a

build-up of emissions on the glass

envelope-which on tungsten bulbs

changes the color characteristics of

the transmitted light.

3. Fluorescent tubes. Some enlarg-

ers will use a series of fluorescent

tubes as the light source. This is re-ferred to as a cold light head and is

discussed in more detail later.

Light Quality. The quality of light

used in an enlarger varies from a

highly diffused light to one where

the light rays are as nearly parallel as

possible. Generally, the more nearly

parallel the light rays (called colli-

mation), the sharper and more de-

tailed the print will be. Sharpness

isn’t everything, however, so other

characteristics have to be taken into

account. The major types of light

available are:

1. Point source. This is a light

source emitting rays that are almost

parallel and give an extremely sharp

print. With 35mm film excessive

sharpness can be a problem, be-

cause small imperfections such as

dust or scratches will be magnified

in proportion to the size enlarge-

ment being made. The sharper the

image and the greater the enlarge-

ment, the more these imperfections

become apparent. Point source illu-

mination is rarely used because of itsability to highlight these imperfec-

tions. Its major application is in the

making of large-scale photo murals.

2. Condenser heads. The conden-

ser enlarger uses a lens to focus the

light from the source onto the nega-

tive plane. Because the light is fo-

cused, the image is sharp and imper-

fections in the negative are obvious

on the print. Its quality of magnify-

ing imperfections is overridden by

its advantages in terms of sharp im-

ages and fast printing times. Forthese reasons, it is the major form of

black-and-white enlarger design.

3. Diffusion heads. The light from

a diffusion enlarger source is unlike

a condenser system in that the light

is highly diffused (less collimated).

This diffusion is achieved in several

ways: opalescent glass can be in-

serted in the light path to mix the

light; the light can be bounced back

an d forth in a mixing chamber to

scramble it; in the old VivitarVI, he

light was diffused by bouncing

against the walls of a light pipe. In all

cases, the goal is to have the light

scrambled at the point where it

reaches the negative plane. This

scrambled light results in a softer

image on the printing plane a nd im-

perfections in the negative are less

obvious on the prints.

140

Page 152: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 152/201

4. Cold-light heads. These are the

ultimate in diffused light. The high

level of scrambling is achieved by

having a very diffused source, which

is usually a series of fluorescent

bulbs in the shape of a grid to covera wide area of space. Because the

source itself is large in relation to the

negative area, and because it is not

focused through a lens system like

the condenser system, it reaches the

negative plane with the light rays

heading in many directions.

Format. Enlargers work best in a rela-

tively narrow range of film formats.

If you plan on printing both 35mm

and 8 x 10negatives, it is not a good

idea to buy an 8 x 10 enlarger anduse it in both formats. Generally, en-

larger design is good enough to en-

compass a small range of film for-

mats an d can do equally well with

35mm and 2 1/4 square, for in-

stance.An enlarger to handle both 5

x 7 an d 8 x 10 negatives also makes

sense.

Qualib of Construction. The quality of

construction is a main criterion for

choosing an enlarger. This quality

will become apparent if you take thetime to work with a few enlargers be-

fore making a buying decision. The

ease and smoothness of operation,

the positive control of locking and

focusing mechanisms, the quality of

materials, and the detailing on the

enlarger itself should all be consid-

ered. I t is definitely worth i t to buy a

quality enlarger.

Modular Design. A fully equipped en-

larger is expensive and long-lasting.

A modular design allows you to buy a

basic black-and-white enlarger now

and add equipment to it as your in-

terests change or you shift into color

printing. Regardless of what you

think you may be doing five years

from now, it is still wise to buy a mod-

ular enlarger. People’s minds

change, and since modular design

costs little extra, you might as well

make provision in case yours

changes too.

Negative Flatness. If the image is to

be undistorted and in focus at all

points, it must be held flat in thenegative carrier. In 35mm this is nor-

mally accomplished by sandwiching

the negative between two sheets of

material that hold it flat but that

have an opening over the image

area. If the carrier is well designed,

this should be sufficient to keep the

negative from buckling. Some en-

largers in 35mm-and many in

larger formats-use carriers with

glass plates to hold the negative.

These plates are made from special

glass that does not make Newtonrings where it comes in contact with

the negative. These glass carriers

hold the negative flat but provide ad-

ditional surfaces for the light to re-

fract off of, which lessens sharpness.

They are also notorious collectors of

dust and fingerprints.

Tilting Lensboard. Some enlargers

have a provision for tilting the board

on which the lens is mounted. This

allows for the correction of distor-

tion known as “convergence of par-

allels.’’ If you have ever taken a pho-

tograph of a tall building from close

up and had to tilt the camera to get

the whole building in, you may have

been surprised at what you saw when

the print came back. The parallel

lines of the vertical walls of the build-

ing will no t be parallel in the photo-

graph butwill converge as they move

farther from the camera position.

This effect is not unlike the appar-

ent convergence of railroad tracks as

they recede into the distance. A tilt-ing lensboard will help correct this

distortion by tilting the image the

other way when printing and

thereby reversing the effect. The

end result is a print with parallel

lines.

Size of Enlargements. The height of

the enlarger column determines the

size of prints that can be made with a

given lens/film format, because the

main determinant for image size is

the negative-to-easel distance. Most

enlargers have a column long

enough to print up to 11x 14 on thebaseboard, which is the size range

that most photographers use. If you

want to make larger prints, buy an

enlarger that accommodates them

on the baseboard, provides a capa-

bility to tilt the enlarger head to

focus the image on a nearby wall, or

build an adjustable baseboard (see

Chapter 6) . One shortcoming of tall

columns is that they have a tendency

to be unstable and cause vibrations

that result in unsharp images. For

economy and convenience, the ad-

justable baseboard is the best an-

swer.

Keep in mind that the size of en-

largement you want may be under-

stated. For example, if you print 11x

14 and buy an enlarger that accom-

modates that size you may be disap-

pointed. If you decide to crop an

image heavily you may discover that

to make an 11x 14 print of the sec-

tion you want you must enlarge the

total projected image to 16 x 20-

beyond the capacity of your en-

larger.

Filter Drawers. If you plan on using

variable contrast papers or experi-

menting with color printing, you will

need a place to put the filters be-

tween the light source and the nega-

tive plane. A good enlarger will have

a drawer into which they can be

placed. If the enlarger does not have

such a drawer, you will have to buy

much more expensive filters that

can be placed between the lens and

the easel.

141

Page 153: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 153/201

Enlargers, continued

Modular Design. Although manyphotographerss t a r t by making black-and-white prints, Kodak's RA printsystem makes color so easy that manywould like to switch. Enlargers nowcome in modular designs that allow thereplacement of the condenser headwith a dichroic head. The head makeschanging variable contrast filtrationmuch easier as well as providing thenecessary f i l ters for color work.

Perspective Correction. This en-

larger head twists t o allow you t o cor-rect perspective problems with animage.

Level. Saunders supplies a level designed specifically to be used to align on an en-larger. Its small size allows it t o be used t o level the negative stage and ensure that it

and the baseboard are in perfect alignment.

How DoYou K n ow th e Lens, Negative, and Easel A re Parallel?

Having all the elements in the enlarger light path parallel is important if the

image is to be sharp from corner to corner and undistorted. Project the image

and focus as you would if you were making the final print.

Gradually move the enlarger or its

lensboard to correct the image area to

make the parallel sides equal in

length.

Correctly Aligned Image. If the projected

image is perfectly parallel to the nega-

tive plane, as it should be, the parallel

sides of the image area will be equal in

length. In this diagram, the parallel

sides A and A' are of equal length to

sides B and B'.

Incorrectly Aligned Image.Measurementsof the image area in the improperly

aligned image reveal that although the

parallel sides B an d B' are of equal

length, those of A and A' are not. This

indicates that either the easel surface,

lens, or negative-or all three-are

out of alignment.

Large Prints. This enlarger allows you

to make mural-size prints by easilyturning the head assembly and project-ing the image onto a wall.

I42

Page 154: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 154/201

Printing a Black Border

Slide Copier. The dichroic head is

turning upside down to provide a light

source that is cool and even. Using the

built-in filters allows color correction of

the slide.

Aristo Cold-Light Head. Aristo

manufactures cold-light diffusion heads

for many of the major models of enlarg-

ers. Because of the type o f light source,

there is no heat on the negative plane

and the highly actinic (photographicallyactive) rays produce extremely fast

printing speeds. The VCL 4500 is a

variable contras t head that fits enlargers

from 35mm to 5 x 7.

Photography is like all oth er a rt forms in tha t it is periodically swept with waves

of fashion. On e of the recent waves is that wh at you shoot is what you print.

Tha t is, some photographers prefer to do all cropping in camera at the time the

picture is taken, the n print t he entire image plus a nar row border of the sur-

rounding unexposed film (clear on t he film, black on th e pr int ).The black bor-

der has the added benefit of holding together wh at might otherwise be a loose-

ly organized image. Here’s how it can be done: T he edges of the window in the

negative carrier are filed down to increase th e opening t o a size slightly larger

than the image area of the negative. Draw guide lines on th e carrier and file

both halves at the same time. Some carriers will already be slightly bigger than

the image area and oth ers will be slightly smaller so the amount of filing neces-

sary varies. File only a small amou nt, insert the negative and hold it up to the

light. If a na rro w area shows ar oun d the negative image area it will print black

because the light coming throu gh it will be unrestricted by negative density. Ifthe bo rder ar oun d the negative area does not show, file in gradual steps until

it does. File corner s carefully-either rounded or squared, but all four the same.

The filing should be done as evenly as possible but mistakes can be evened

ou t in the print by adjusting the blades of the printing easel. With the negative

in the carrier focus th e enlarger on the easel surface with the image enlarged

to t he size you wan t. Now, instead of using t he easel blades t o make sharp edgeson the sides of th e image area they should be backed off slightly to leave room

for the black border. The distance t he easel blades ar e backed off from the im-

age area makes any fine adjustments of the width of the black border.

I4 3

Page 155: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 155/201

Enlarging Lenses

A chain is only as strong as its weak-

est link, and the chances are that in

most darkrooms the weakest optical

link is the enlarging lens. Most of us

are quite willing to spend a great

deal for a new wide-angle or tele-photo lens, but are happy to accept a

lens that came as part of the “pack-

age” when the enlarger was pur-

chased. A top camera lens will not

overcome the deficiencies of a

cheap enlarger lens, so it’s worth the

extra money to upgrade your en-

larger lens if need be. You may dis-

cover after printing with a better en-

larger lens that your camera lens is

better than you thought.

When purchasing an enlarger

lens there are several factors to con-

sider.

Optical Quality. Enlarging lenses dif-

fer from camera lenses: they are de-

signed to project a flat image (the

negative) onto a flat plane (the

easel). When first buying a lens, you

may have to rely on brand names to

determine quality, but if you can test

the lens before buying it, there are

ways to check its quality.

Evenness of Illuminationfrom Corner to

Corne?:For each lens aperture set-

ting, expose a sheet of the paper size

you normally use sufficiently to give

you a middle gray tone. Try to ob-

tain the same tone on each sheet

(the Kodak enlarging calculator in

the “Kodak Darkroom Guide” can

be used to adjust times as apertures

change). Compare the prints to see

if any show the image tone becom-

ing lighter toward the edges and cor-

ners. If so, those apertures should be

avoided or the lens returned.

Resolution. Using a Kodak test nega-

tive and a low paper grade to reduce

contrast, make a print at each of the

lens’s aperture settings. Compare

them to see if they are sharp across

the entire image area. If not, select

the one that is sharpest, and you

have at least determined your lens’s

optimal setting.

W h a t Enlarger Lens

Focal Length?

Ordinarily, the focal length of the

enlarger lens neede d to provideeven illumination for a given size

negative is the same as the focal

length of the taking (camera)

lens for that format. Going one

step back, the normal taking lens

of the camera is approximately

equal to the diagonal of the nega-

tive. This means th at the normal

lens for a 35mm negative is 50mm

for both the camera and en-

larger. For a 2 1/4 x 2 1/4 nega-

tive it would be 75mm.

Focal Lengths

Negative Enlarger lens

size focal length

35mm 50mm

2 1/4 x 2 1/4 75mm-105mm

2 1/4 x 3 1/4 lOOrnm

6cm x 7cm lOOmm

4 x 5 135rnm-150mm

Beseler HD Series Enlarging

Lenses. Beseler lenses are high-qualitylenses that meet the most critical de-mands of the amateur photographer.

I44

Page 156: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 156/201

Schneider Componon Lenses.

Schneider Componon lenses have anexcellent reputation. They performextremely well through their entirerange of apertures. They are expensivebut worth every penny if you careabout obtaining the sharpest possibleimages.

Wide-Angle Lenses. Bogen was oneof the f i r s t to introduce the concept ofwide-angle enlarging lenses. Theselenses reduce the negative-to-easeldistance required for a given enlarge-ment. They also reduce the vibrationproblem caused by raising the enlargerhead on the column, because they re -

duce the height to which it must beraised for a given image size.

Lens-Cleaning Cloth. Much handierthan old lens-cleaning solutions (espe-cially when on location) that requiredthe moistening of a lens surface, then

usinga special tissue t o wipe it off-which was almost impossible to dooutside. If kept clean and used withcare, it will last a long time and giveexcellent results.

I45

Page 157: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 157/201

Easels

A seeming misnomer, enlarging

easels are so named because early

photographic enlargers were hori-

zontal devices, and upright artists’

easels were used to hold the print

material in front of the lens. Thesteady evolution of these paper hold-

ers now offers the darkroom enthu-

siast a wide choice of easel types,

styles, and, of course, sizes.

To the beginner, an easel is often

an afterthought, selected on the

basis of lowest cost to complete the

enlarger outfit. Even limited dark-

room experience, however, will show

that the proper choice of easels will

pay dividends in printing speed,

convenience, and accuracy. More-

over, like the enlarger, the easel, if

properly selected, is usually a one-

time purchase whose useful life is

usually measured in decades. The

all-purpose easel is a bladed type,

which permits adjustable border

sizes. Most low-cost easels are two-

bladed styles that are satisfactory for

the beginner, although they have

two limitations. First, paper is always

registered into the upper left-hand

corner and to position the paper

under the enlarger lens, the easel is

moved down and to the right of the

baseboard. When making small

prints, the easel can hang over the

edges of the baseboard, which can

be awkward. Second, t he range of

border treatments and sizes is lim-

ited. Most professionals prefer a

high-quality four-bladed easel that

always stays centered on the base-

board and that permits making bor-

ders up to 2” or more. However, if

price is crucial, you are better off

with a goodquality two-bladed easelthan with an inexpensive four-

bladed one. There are also available

a large number of special purpose

easels, ranging from ones that make

test strips to ones that hold the

paper flat with either static electric-

ity or a vacuum.

How to Select an Enlarging Easel

1.Determine the largest paper size you commonly print (for very large prints,

you will want to bench-mount or wall-mount your enlarger).

2. Decide what type of easel is best suited to your requirements-bladed, bor-

derless, single-size (speed easel), or multi-print.

3. When going to a camera store to look at easels, take along a fresh sheet of

unprocessed paper of the maximum size you’ll be printing (don ’t roll it and

don’ t take a processed print, since paper often stretches after processing).

4.Examine the easel you are considering on a solid table at a normal working

height. After reviewing the instructions, operate the easel a few times to get

used to it and then try loading and unloading it with your eyes closed.You will

be surprised at the difference in registration an d handling characteristics be-

tween different easels.

5. Check for border accuracy by tracing the blades with a sharp pencil. (Be sure

your test paper is, in fact, square.)

6. Hold the easel at eye level and sight across the face, checking for flatness,

7. Look for good finish, a skid-resistant bottom, smooth edges, good f i t inhinges and working parts, accurate scales, adjustments that stay put, and blades

that are absolutely flat and square.

4-in- I Easels. This Premier 4-in- 1easel is typical of models that allow youto make more than one image size on asingle easel. This model has three sizeson the front and a border for 8 x 10

printing on the back side.

Borderless Easels. Borderless printsin the past were made under glass, untilSaunders introduced their unique bor-derless easel with angled paper retain-ers. This easel i s now widely imitated,but quality among other brands varies.These easels work on the “cone oflight” principle, permitting the projectedlight from the enlarger to expose the

very edges of the paper, even while theprint is securely held by retainerswhose front edges match the projectionangle. In judging these easels, look forsmooth and straight paper retainersthat are usually extruded aluminum.Check for perfect base flatness andsmooth finish. The non-skid material onthe bottom of the base is most impor-tant, and the best borderless types uselong cork strips along all sides.

I46

Page 158: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 158/201

Single-Size Easels. When makingquantity prints, or for sheer speed andconvenience, single-size easels are thelogical choice. Ganz makes a full selec-tion of easels of this type that are

loaded by sliding the paper into a chan-nel. These easels are lightweight and canbe taped to the baseboard t o preventtheir being pushed out of position.

All single-size easels have fixed bor-ders, usually 3/16” or 1/4” all around.This is fine for publicity prints, catalogshots, o r commercial shots that are tobe placed in frames or folders.

Vacuum Easels. Rather than useblades to hold paper flat for printing, it

is also possible to use a vacuum. ThisKodak vacuum register pumps the airout from behind the paper so air

pressure holds it f lat against the easelsurface.

Courtesy Eastman Kodak Company

Four-Bladed Easel. The Saunders Omega easel is the standard in the industrywhen it comes to four-bladed easels. The four blades allow you t o center the imageon the paper, leaving a white border on all sides. This makes the prints more attrac-tive if you do not want to trim and dry mount them.

I4 7

Page 159: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 159/201

Focusing Magnifiers

When making an enlargement, it is

always desirable to have the image

projected onto the paper plane as

sharply as possible. If it is not, the re-

sulting image will be blurry and the

quality of both the taking and en-larging lenses will be undercut. Fo-

cusing with the naked eye is ex-

tremely accurate, assuming you have

extremely accurate vision, but nat-

ural selection being what it is these

days, a lot of photographers cannot

see as well as they should. In order to

compensate and make us all equal,

manufacturers have developed vari-

ous focusing devices, all of which op-

erate on the same general principle.

They focus the projected image

through an eyepiece so that what

you see is the image as it appears on

the easel surface but enlarged many

times, making a small part of it very

easy to see.

How to G et the Sharpest Print

This allows you to watch the mag-

nified grain go from fuzzy to sharp

to fuzzy again as you adjust the

focus. You can then select the point

at which the image is the sharpest.

Since focusing on the film grain it-self rather than on a part of the

image (which might have been de-

liberately left out of focus) is the best

way to ensure a sharp image, one of

these devices can be a real t ime saver

and can help to make better prints.

The main features to look for

when buying a magnifier are the

amount of magnification, the dura-

bility, and the lens construction. As

with everything else in photography,

price is usually a general indicator of

quality, but you must determine

what price meets your own needs ad-

equately.

All focusing magnifiers are designed to focus on the same plane upon which

their base rests. Therefore, if you focus with the grain magnifier on the easel

surface and then use a piece of double-weight paper on which to make a print,

you have not focused an d printed on exactly the same plane. To eliminate this

problem, you can put a piece of paper similar to the one on which you print

und er the base of the magnifier. If you use the same paper regularly you can

glue a piece to the base of the magnifier, which eliminates the need to think

about it every time you want to focus.

When focusing, the best way to find the sharpest image is the same way you

would with a microscope or a ground glass on a view camera. You focus until

the image comes into focus then goes slightly out. You then back up to the

sharpest image an d go slightly past it, repeating this back and forth while grad-

ually narrowing the range of movement until you have the image focused with-

out doubt.

Each f-stop of the enlarging lens will have a slightly different focus, so either

focus using the f-stop at which you plan to print, or at least print at a smaller f-

stop (which has more depth of field).

Focusing Magnifiers. A focusingmagnifier works by reflecting some ofthe light from the enlarger up into aneyepiece that magnifies the reflectedimage. The unit is designed so that thedistance of the light path from the en-larging lens to the focus magnifier’smirror, and then to i t s eyepiece (A), isidentical to the distance of the light pathfrom the enlarging ens to the base-board on which the magnifier rests (B).

This design allows you t o see the smallimage grains in the negative exactly theway they appear on the baseboard. Thisallows you to focus the image veryfinely and also explains why the magni-fier needs to be resting on the samesurface that you print on, since it’s

designed to bring that point into focus.Place a piece of the paper you areprinting on under the magnifier whenfocusing.

I48

Page 160: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 160/201

Page 161: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 161/201

Page 162: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 162/201

Leland Power Clean 1. The LelandPower Clean I i s an environmentally

safe (and very stylish) addition t o thearea of compressed gases that photog-raphers use to remove dust from theirnegatives or any type of equipment. The

problem with it s that it has a roundedbottom and will not stand up, taking upmore counter space than necessary.

Kostiner Anti-Static Brush. Specialsynthetic brush fibers use resistanceflow to eliminate dust and static elec-tricity. There are no radioactive ele-

ments, and no chemicals.

Antistatic Cloth. Ifyou are verycareful, you can use a cloth such as thisBeseler antistatic cloth for negativecleaning. To be effective, it must beperfectly clean; any di rt on it canscratch a negative.

Cotton Gloves. When doing exten-sive handling of negatives (or prints), anounce of prevention is worth a poundof cure. The best insurance against

fingerprints is to wear a pair of clean,lint-free cot ton gloves like these fromPorters Camera Store. They are inex-pensive and reduce the worry o f damag-ing the negatives as a result of a mis-take.

Compressed Air. Compressed air, although somewhat luxurious for most dark-rooms, is invaluable for chasing dust from negatives and equipment. Ifyou have ac-cess to a small electric compressor, make sure the air i s made dry and oil-free byproper filtration.

Photo by Metzger Studio, Rochester, Ne w York

151

Page 163: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 163/201

Printing and Exposure Controls

Beginning photographers often ex-

perience difficulties when making

their first prints. Th e density of their

negatives tends to vary from greatly

underexposed to greatly overex-

posed. Each print becomes an ex-ploration in patience when you t ry

to find the proper exposure. The

problem is compounded because

densities vary within the negative it-

self, and therefore there may not be

a perfect printing exposure for the

entire negative. Luckily, there are

devices available and certain tech-

niques that can be learned to make

it easy to find the correct exposure

for the print as a whole and also to

m o q he exposure of various por-

tions within the print.

The Correct Exposure

Expensive electronic exposure me-

ters are not necessary for making

high-quality prints. They are used by

labs making large quantities of

prints, but most photographers pre-

fer the quite accurate method of

making a test strip, which is a piece

of printing paper on which a series

of exposures are made at progres-sively longer times. By reviewing the

test strip after it has been developed

and fured, it is easy to pick out the

part of the strip that looks best.

The Work Print

The time on the part of the test strip

that looked right is then used to ex-

pose the entire image on what is

called a work print. This print is de-veloped a nd fixed and then evalu-

ated in terms of the tonal values.

Some areas may be too dark and oth-

ers too light. At this point a decision

must be made as to how to change

the various tones. You can accom-

plish this by changing paper grades

(the higher the grade, the higher

the contrast) or by local burning

and dodging. Burning means in-

creasing the exposure time for vari-

ous parts of the print to make them

darker; dodging is holding backlight from sections to make them

lighter.

The Final Print

The final print can be the same as

the work print if everything is satis-

factory. Normally, however, the final

prin t will have to be manipulated to

some extent to make it a more inter-

esting or effective image. The tools

needed to control the values in the

print are simple and can be made

out of cardboard. Some are also

available commercially and are de-

scribed in this section.

Kodak Projection Print Scale. Thisprojection print scale consists of aplastic sheet with each pie-shaped slice

having a different density. When placedover the printing paper so light passesthrough it during the exposure, thefinished print wil l show wedges of vary-ing darkness. By comparing the one thatseems right wi th the print scale, you candetermine the correct exposure timefor the work print.

Courtesy Eastman KodakCompany

Enlarging Exposure Meter . ThisPaterson meter i s typicalof exposuremeters used in making enlargements. Ifyou work with widely varying negativedensities, they can help you save paperby reducing he number of test stripsyou wil l need to make.

I52

Page 164: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 164/201

Dodging and Burning

You can make dodging tools at

home out of pieces of black card-

board cut from empty printing

paper containers and taped to apiece of wire coat hanger. Circles or

other shapes of various sizes can be

made to hold back light from larger

or smaller areas.

Burning tools do the opposite of

dodging tools: they hold back the

light from the majority of the print

while increasing the exposure of a

relatively small portion of it. Several

pieces of cardboard, each with a dif-

ferent size hole, will be useful. The

holes can be circular or cut to the

general shape of the area you wantdarkened. Vignetting tools are simi-

lar to those used in burning, but

they generally have a larger open-

ing, often with a serrate d edge, so

that when the tool is moved about in

the beam of light from the lens, it

will leave a smooth and gradual line

between the dark and light areas.

Vignetter. This Testrite vignetter canbe varied in size to fit the size area youwish to vignette. It can also be used as aburning tool by changing the size to fit

the area you want burned. Oscillate it

smoothly and continuously in the lightbeam while making the exposure. Kodak produces many sources of tech-

nical information. The reader may wantto avail themselves of this extensivebody of information by obtaining a l is t

of these publications from their localcamera store. This one is a must for thedarkroom beginner, but also is a goodreference guide for the experiencedprinter.

Test Strip. This t es t strip is typical ofhow they can be made. Each successivestrip has an increased exposure overthe previous strip. By looking a t thestrip, you can tel l what the correct

printing time should be. One of the keypoints to remember is to place a part of

the print that shows al l of the tonalvalues to be considered in each segmentof the t es t strip. If this i s not done, it

will be impossible to judge the correctexposure as it relates to both highlightsand shadows.

I53

Page 165: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 165/201

Negative Storage and Proof Printers

After the camera has been unloaded

and the film developed, it’s impor-

tant that the negatives be stored

carefully an d that you can see what is

on them. A negative is an irreplace-

able record and should be treatedwith the care that all such items de-

serve. The history of photography is

replete with stories of valuable nega-

tives being destroyed. Many Civil

War negatives on glass plates, includ-

ing some Brady negatives of Lincoln,

were recycled into such useful items

as greenhouses. You may not want to

preserve your negatives for posterity,

but you may want to make prints

from them in the future, so they

should be maintained in as good a

condition as possible.

Contact-printed proofsheets can

be made to show you what the nega-

tives contain. They are made by lay-

ing the negatives, emulsion side

down, on a sheet of printing paper,

holding them flat with a piece of

glass, and exposing them with the

enlarger light. The resulting images

are the same size as the negative

image. Making proofsheets serves

several purposes:

1. It lets you more easily find agiven negative by allowing you to

look at positive images rather than

holding negative strips up to the

light.

2. If contact sheets are made cor-

rectly, the proof will tell you no t only

the subject matter of the negative,

but also its quality in terms of expo-

sure, density, sharpness, and so

forth. To determine the density of a

given negative it is important to

print all of your proofsheets to the

same standard. In this way you can

tell by looking if the negative is

under- or overexposed or is satisfac-

tory.

How to Standardize

Proofsheets

Many photographers try to make

their proofsheets look like a series of

little gallery prints. The problem

with that approach is that it makes it

difficult to evaluate negatives that

are selected for enlargement. It

makes a great deal of sense to stan-

dardize the exposure given to allproofsheets so you can tell immedi-

ately by looking at them if a given

negative is wellexposed or is under-

or overexposed. You will also be able

to tell if you are consistently under-

exposing or overexposing the film.

To standardize the printing of

proofsheets you must determine the

exact exposure time required to

print pure black in the areas of the

negative lacking in detail (very

dense shadow areas). This is accom-

plished by testing to determine howmuch exposure is necessary to ob-

tain pur e blacks in the unexposed

edges of the film.

The edge of 35mm film has a se-

ries of sprocket holes used to trans-

port the film when it is advanced in

the camera. These holes are com-

pletely transparent because the film

has been removed from them. The

area around the holes appears to be

transparent, but it actually has some

density (called film base plus fog).

To determine the correct exposure

you have to determine a t what point

the area around the sprocket holes

turnsjust as black as they are. Here’show:

1 . With a negative in the enlarger,

focus it as if you were planning to

print a full-frame 11 x 14 enlarge-

ment. Remove the negative.

2. Make a test strip using the neg-

atives and proof printer, giving in-

creasingly longer exposures to each

successive strip, that is, 5 , 10, 15, 20seconds.

3. Process the print sheet and ex-

amine i t und er good lighting. Youwill notice that the area under the

sprocket holes turns pure black

much earlier than does the area sur-

round ing them. At some point on

the test strip, the holes should no

longer be distinguishable from the

surrounding area because both the

holes and the surrounding area are

pure black. The time of exposure

needed to make this happen is the

correct exposure to make all subse-

quent proofsheets.

If as a result of standardizing you

find that all of your proofsheets are

too light or too dark, you will know

that you have a tendency to over- or

underexpose. You should make the

correction at the time the picture is

taken (or later, when the print is

made), and not tinker with the

proofsheets.

Negative Carrier . Saunders has

developed a negative carrie r that can be

used in a 4 x 5 enlarger to make en-

larged proofsheets. Th e p roblem with

standard 35mm proofs i s that it i s very

difficult to evaluate accurately the image

because of it s very small size. W it h this

unit, the proofsheets have enlarged

images that are easier to evaluate.

I54

Page 166: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 166/201

Print File. Although some negativestorage envelopes on the market re-quire you t o remove the negatives fromthe sheet to make a proof sheet, thisstep has been eliminated by some of thenewer envelopes that allow you to printthrough the sheet holding the negatives.In addition to beinga great time-saverthis also subjects the negatives t o lesshandling and therefore reduces thepossibility that they incur any dam-age. Print File makes a complete line ofthese negative storage envelopes fordifferent film formats. They are alsodesigned t o fit any 3-hole binder whicheliminates the additional expense ofhaving t o pay a higher price to fit anonstandard storage binder.

Large Print Files. Used for storing large size prints.

Proof Printer. Print File and othersalso make proof printers that hold thenegatives flat against the printing paper,which is absolutely necessary if yourproof sheets are to have accurate, sharpimages. This can be done with a piece ofclear glass but if you pr int a number ofrolls at one time the hinged proofprinter makes it much easier and faster.

Print File Hangers. These plasticinserts allow Print Files to be used in a

standard Pendaflex filing system.

I 5 5

Page 167: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 167/201

9 The Color Darkroom

Page 168: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 168/201

Contents

Introduction o Color

The Color Darkroom

Color Enlargers

Color Analyzers and

CalculatorsDrum and Tank Color

Processors

Page 169: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 169/201

Introduction to Color

With the introduction during the

past few years of greatly simplified

color-print chemistry and affordable

processing equipment, there has

been a phenomenal increase in in-

terest in color printing. More andmore home darkroom photogra-

phers and professionals are making

their own color prints. Until a few

years ago, the time, effort, and ex-

pense involved made it impractical

for anyone but a technical expert to

do what anyone can do today.

Equipment Common to All Color Processes

The Starter Darkroom

One of the first questions a teacher

of color photography is usuallyEnlarger (page 142)

asked is, %hat kind of darkroom do

I need? ” Th e assumption is that

something very elaborate is re-

quired. However, a color darkroom

can be even simpler than one de-

signed for black-and-white process-

ing. One of the main differences

pertains to safelight illumination.

Color printing paper is sensitive to

light of all colors, so it cannot be ex-

posed to bright safelight illumina-

tion. (Some papers allow the use of

dim safelights, but the illuminationis so weak it provides little help.)

This shortcoming is easily overcome;

once the paper is exposed under the

enlarger it is placed into a light-tight

drum or tabletop printmaker for

processing.

This section is a general overview;

additional information can be

found in the following sections of

this chapter. As a primer, however,

here are the basic materials needed

to set up a color darkroom or to con-

vert a black-and-white darkroom tocolor.

Safelights (page 93)

Dichroic Filter Enlarger Head

(page 163)

Print-Viewing Filters (page 165)

I58

Page 170: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 170/201

Equipment Needed for Conventional Tray or Drum Color Process

One of the many types of enlargingpaper for making prints from negatives.

Plastic Print Trays (page 126)

Kodak’s RA Chemistry in the 10-Litre Size. It may seem like a lot, but it lasts a

long time if the developer i s not mixed with the activator (not shown) until justbefore use.

Print Processing Drums (page 167)

Chemistry Kit for Developing Color Negatives (C-4 I ) from JOBO. Makes I

l i t re of working solution, which can process I 2 to I 6 rolls of I35/36 color negativefilm or the equivalent area of other sizes.

I59

Page 171: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 171/201

Page 172: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 172/201

Th e RA Color Darkroom

2

3

The RA Color Darkroom. Thesimplicity of the RA process reducesthe amount of processing equipment

needed to make color prints. The basicrequirement is a light-proof room withsufficient counter space to set up theenlarger and printmaker. In addition tothe enlarger and printmaker, you willalso need the following items:

I. Timer. To time the exposure andthe processing of the print a standarddarkroom timer with a range fromI second to 60 minutes should be

sufficient (see “Timing Systems” inChapter 7).

2. Color Printing Filters or a Color

Head on the Enlarger. Needed tocontrol color balance in the print.

3. Safelight. Most people do not use asafelight when printing color. Kodakadvises that a No. I 3 will be safe, but it

is too dim to be useful.

4. RA Paper. Comes in glossy andsmooth-lustre surfaces.

5. RA Developer.

6. Beseler AC P 50 5 Table-Top

Processor.

7. The Kodak Color Print Viewing

Filter Kit. To help guide you in evalu-ating your prints and obtaining hecorrect color balance (see “ColorAnalyers and Calculators” later in thischapter).

8. Easel. An easel holds the paper flatand positions it under the enlarger. Easels

are available with moveable blades thatadjust the size of the image on thepaper. (See “Easels” in Chapter 8.)

161

Page 173: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 173/201

Color Enlargers

Color print ing has several problems

that are not encountered in black

and white work. These problems

have influenced enlarger design,

and to a large extent the difficulties

have been overcome by modernequipment.

F trat on

Because of the complexities in-

volved in their manufacture, color

negatives, or slides that are used to

make color prints, are no t in perfect

color balance. Even if they are, the

enlarger light source will not be

color balanced, or the print emul-

sion will react differently from what

is expected. Any of these variablescan throw a print out of balance. To

remedy this, color filters are inserted

somewhere between the light source

and the print to correct the light.

There are three possibilities:

1. CC (color-compensating) filters.

These are very expensive because

they are gelatin filters used between

the lens and the paper. The image

passes through them, so they must

be optically pure. Because of their

high cost and their delicate, easily-scratched surface, they are not often

used in the average darkroom.

2. CP colorprinting)filters. These

are used between the light source

and the negative. Because the image

does not pass through them, they

can be made of a less expensive ma-

terial. Most enlargers have a filter

drawer that can be used to hold

these filters. They do have the ad-

vantage of being inexpensive, but at

the same time, since they are made

of a dyed acetate-polyester, hey tend

to fade with age and lose their color-

correcting ability.

3. Dichroic filtrat ion. These filters

are made of glass. They are not used

in the same way as acetate filters;

they are built into the enlarger head

itself. Filtration is varied by moving

the filters partially into or o ut of the

beam of light from the enlarger

head. The farther the filters are

placed into the light beam, the more

filtration they provide. Because only

part of the light goes through the fil-

ter, the total amount of light reach-

ing the negative is higher for thesame degree of filtration than with

acetate filters. They are also much

more permanent than other types of

filters and can therefore be counted

on to give consistent results over a

long period of time. They also allow

finer filtration steps. They can be

varied in steps of .01, whereas ac-

etate filters come in steps of .025

Voltage Variations

The color balance of an enlargerbulb depends to a large degree on

the voltage that is used to light it.

Variations in the voltage will cause

variations in the color of the light

coming from the bulb. The same ef-

fect is at work in black-and-white

printing, but the slight variations are

not sufficient to be noticeable in the

print. Because successful printing is

based o n eliminating as many vari-

ables as possible, manufacturers

have produced devices called volt-

age regulators to use with color en-largers. These regulators give the

same output voltage to the enlarger

bulb, regardless of voltage variations

in the incoming line.

Consistent Light Source

Tungsten light sources, which have

been used for years in black-and-

white enlargers, have problems

when used for color printing. They

tend to change their color balance

over their life cycle, because of aging

of the filament and the build-up of

emissions on the inside of the glass

envelope in which they are encased.

This continuous change in color bal-

ance makes it difficult to obtain con-

sistent results over a long period of

time. If you print a negative one

week and then use the same negative

an d set of filters ( a filter pack) a

month from then, the filtration will

be off because of a change in the

light bulb. To overcome this prob-

lem modern enlargers use a quartz-

halogen lamp that does not have a

build-up of emissions on the insideof the envelope and maintains a con-

stant color balance throughout its

life cycle.

Heat on the Negative

Plane

Heat on the negative plane is caused

by the infrared part of the light spec-

trum and can cause buckling of the

negative, especially during long ex-

posures. To overcome this problem

the designers have developed severaltechniques, including the use of fil-

ters and light pipes. Some use a com-

bination of fiber optics and an nfra-

red reflector that passes the visible

light but reflects the heat-producing

light out of the optical path. A n-

other solution has been to install a

cooling fan in the enlarger head, but

this can cause vibration problems.

Enlarger Bulbs

This graph shows the relative be-

havior of both tungsten and

quartz-halogen bulbs. The quartz

bulb tends to maintain a consistent

color balance over its life com-

pared to the gradual decay of the

tungsten bulb. If your enlarger is

already equipped with a tungsten

bulb the best solution is to reserve

a special bulb for color printing

only. This way, if you print color

only occasionally between long ses-

sions of black and white printing,

the bulb will not change as drasti-cally as it would if you were using it

for both kinds of printing.

I62

Page 174: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 174/201

Color Heads. Most major brands of enlargers can be purchased with a black-and-white condenser head and later be converted to color. These two pictures of theOmega enlarger show it with and without the color head. In many enlargers theaddition of the color head changes the enlarger from a condenser to a diffusion lightsource. The enlarger can be used for color printing without the color head by insert-

ing filters in the filter drawer just below the top unit.

Dichroic Head. Changing the con-denser head on your enlarger to adichroic head improves the ability t oprint variable contrast BN V as well as

color. Most dichroic heads change your

enlarger from a condenser light sourcet o a diffusion light source.

Voltage Regulators. Here is theentire Super Chromega color enlarging

system including a voltage regulator.Voltage regulators will keep the voltagesupplied to the enlarger lamp at an evenI 5 volts, despite any variations in theinput from the electrical company. Thisensures that every print you make willhave the same enlarger light brilliance,and this consistency eliminates one ofthe major sources of different printdensities and color balances.

A 5-volt change will affect the colorbalance about as much as a CC 0 filter,with the effect most noticeable at theblue end of the spectrum.

transformers to reduce the voltage t othe lamp (quartz-halogen) and act asvoltage regulators. The control theygive i s sufficient and makes a separatevoltage-regulator unnecessary.

Some color enlargers use step-down

I63

Page 175: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 175/201

Color Analyzers and Calculators

When printing in black and white,

the photographer is primarily con-

cerned with determining the correct

density and contrast range of the

print. In color printing, these basic

concerns are only part of the prob-lem. The major difficulty for begin-

ning color printers is determining a

color balance, so that the colors in

the print appear the way you want

them to. Manufacturers have devel-

oped a number of products to assist

in dete rmin ing what the correct

color filtration should be to give you

a print that you like.

Electronic Color Analyzers

Electronic color analyzers are de-

vices designed to give you the cor-

rect printing time and color filtra-

tion required to make a high-quality

color print. Unfortunately, to use

one you first have to make a print

with a color balance you like. You

then use that print to calibrate the

analyzer. Once the calibration is

made, the analyzer will automati-

cally compare any subsequent nega-

tives or slides with the color balance

Light Required toView

Color Prints

The quality of the light used to

evaluate color prints is extremely

important. The light should be as

close as possible in its color

makeup to th e light th at will even-

tually be used to view the print.

Most prints are viewed in light

close to daylight in color balance,

so you should use a light source of

the same quality. A fluorescent

bulb such as the Norelco Color

Match 5000 will provide illumina-

tion with the same color balance

as daylight.

Color balance cannot be accur-

ately checked unless the print is dry,

so be sure you have the right light

source and a dry print or you may

be disappointed in the morning.

of the “ideal one” used to calibrate

it. It will then indicate the filtration

pack required to duplicate the color

balance and exposure time of the

“ideal”print.

There are two difficulties that youcan expect when using one of these

analyzers. The first is that you may

have a problem making the first

print needed to calibrate the ma-

chine. Since it does not come precal-

ibrated, you will have to make at

least one good print by more tradi-

tional methods so that you have a

standard to use in calibrating the

machine. The second problem

arises from the fact that it is almost

impossible to use one “ideal” prin t

to jud ge a large number of subse-quent photographs. Sunsets are

quite a bit different from snow-cov-

ered scenes, and the analyzer cannot

make judgments about how you

want to interpret them. All it can d o

is try to make each print look like

the last, but that is not the goal of

most color printers. Some analyzers

are being designed to allow for pro-

gramming with any number of

“ideal” prints. Each time the ma-

chine is calibrated to a particular

image the information can be stored

and reused. After a period of time

you can assemble a library of “ideal”

images covering a broad range of

possibilities. You can then use the“snow-covered” program to deter-

mine the exposure of all subsequent

snow-covered scenes, and so on.

Another problem with analyzers

is that when you change the paper

emulsion you will have to recali-

brate. If you want, buy an analyzer

when you first start to print in color,

but do it with your eyes open and

with the expectation of doing some

hard work on top of what the ana-

lyzer will do for you. A well-balanced

and exposed color print will still bethe result of experience, which an

analyzer cannot yet duplicate. Un-

less you are making large numbers

of prints based on the same emul-

sion, a color analyzer is not of much

use to you. You will be surprised at

how quickly you become adept at

finding the right filters for the print

you want using some of the less ex-

pensive alternatives illustrated on

this and the next page.

Calculator Grids. These are ingenious devices that help you select bo th exposure and

filtration. Th e grid is placed over the print before i t is exposed. A diffuser is placed over

the lens of the enlarger to scramble the colors and give an even illumination of the print.

The print is exposed, processed, and dried. Th e portion of the print that is exposed to

the value of I8 percent gray is the corr ect exposure. By reading the scales on t he sides of

the grid, you can easily figure out th e filtration requi red to achieve that exposure and

color balance.

I 64

Page 176: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 176/201

Page 177: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 177/201

Drum andTank Color Processors

Color-print processors all perform

the same function: to move the print

through the chemistry, or move the

chemistry over the print. Four basic

designs are used today that vary de-

pending on the type of darkroomand the quantity of prints being

processed. Theoretically, it is possi-

ble not to use a processor at all. But

you would need sufficient patience

and a high enough threshold of

claustrophobia to stand in a totally

dark room while processing the

prints in a tray just like black-and-

white prints. Putting your hands into

color developer and breathing the

fumes from open trays do not con-

tribute to a very healthy way to work.

Few of us have the sort of patiencerequired and therefore choose to

work with a processor.

The Four MainTypes of

Color Processors

Drum with Roller: This is simply a

light-tight drum very much like a

film developing can, into which the

exposed print is placed. It is then

closed with caps at either end.

Chemistry can be poured in and

emptied through light-traps in the

en d caps. The roller base agitates

the drum after the chemistry hasbeen poured in. Roller bases can be

operated by hand or can be motor-

ized. In some cases, the roller is just

a rim around the drum that allows

the drum to be easily rolled back

and forth on the counter or in the

sink to provide agitation.

Because of their simplicity, these

drum processors are used by almost

everyone making color prints, un-

less their budget and/or volume

requires or allows a machine proces-

sor.

Kodak Processors. Unlike drum

processors, these are stand-up units

into which the chemistry is poured.

The print is then transported

through the machine and the vari-

ous chemicals by a roller transport

mechanism. These processors must

be used in total darkness, because

they are no t light-proof and also are

designed to use chemical replenish-

ment rather than one-shot chem-

istry. They are also quite expensive.

Basket Processing. Basket processing

allows you to process more than one

print at the same time. A series of

prints can be stored in a light-tight

drawer and then placed in the bas-

ket for immersion in the chemicals.

Most photographers rarely process

more than one print at a time, and

basket processing is therefore pri-

marily a tool of commercial printers.

Daylight Processors. Some manufactur-

ers have recently introduced rela-

tively inexpensive, self-contained,

light-tight processors that sit on a

counter. These also hold the chem-istry in temperature-regulated tanks

and either pass the print through it

by means of rollers, or pump the

chemistry across the surface of the

print. With the stability of the RA

chemistry system, the processor can

be left filled for more than a week

and prints can be made at your

leisure.

Proces sor Basket. This Leedalprocessor basket i s typical of thoseused commercially. The cost and capac-ity of this kind of unit restricts it to thehigh-volume operator.

I6 6

Page 178: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 178/201

Medium-Volume Basket Processor. This Unicolor unit is a basket processor

for those photographers whose capacity has increased over what a drum system canhandle but who cannot afford the cost of a continuous-processing machine. It comesequipped with an intank heater and can be equipped with a Unicolor temperaturecontroller to maintain a consistent temperature. The unit’s capacity i s ten 8 x I0prints at one time. It can also be used to process black-and-white prints o r sheetfilm.

Daylight Dru m Processor. TheBeseler i s one of the most advanceddrum processors on the market today.

in a variety of sizes and should matchthe print sizes you plan on making. If

you print in more than one size, it i s

cheaper to buy different drums, becausea small print in a large drum will wasteexpensive chemistry.

Drums for this and other units come

I67

Page 179: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 179/201

10 Print Finishing

Page 180: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 180/201

Contents

Dryers

Mounting

Matting and Storing Prints

Framing

Page 181: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 181/201

Dryers

There is something terrifpng about

the irreversibility of processing neg-

atives. Most photographers don’t

mind ruining a print because it’s

done all the time an d it’s relatively

easy to make another, but a ruinednegative is gone forever. This mor-

tality tends to keep experimentation

to a minimum. Drying is the stage

where negatives are most susceptible

to damage, especially from streak-

ing, dust, and scratching. Because of

the softness of the negative emulsion

at this stage, there is a great deal of

controversy over how to dry them

without damage. Many photogra-

phers use a wetting agent to assist

the water to run off so it will not

build up in drops that leave a

residue when dried. After using the

wetting agent, some photographers

squeegee their negatives with a small

viscous sponge specially manufac-

tured for photo use (kitchen

sponges scratch).

Th e negatives should always be

hung in a dust-free area to dry. The

ideal place is either an unused

shower (r un t he shower for a few

minutes first to settle any dust), or a

sealed negative drying cabinet.

Never use unfiltered hot air to speed

drying, because there is a good

chance that all you will do is imbed

dust in the negative emulsion. All

negatives, when hung to dry, should

be weighted at the bottom to elimi-

nate curling.

Clothespins. There is no substitutefor the humble clothespin as a negativedryer. You can clip one t o the top ofthe film to hold it to a string strungacross your shower, drying cabinet, orthe darkroom. At the bot tom of thefilm, clip another clothespin to keep thefilm strip taut, otherwise it will curl as it

dries and stick t o itself where it curls. Ahook can be attached to one end of the

clothespin to make it easier t o hang onthe string. Be sure to buy the spring-loaded clothespins, and not the onesthat are a simple notch in a piece of

wood.

Stainless Steel Film Clips. If youthink clothespins make your darkroom

look tacky, buy yourself a complete s e t

of stainless steel clips such as thesemade by the Photo MaterialsCo.Theycome in two versions. The one illus-trated is t o attach the film t o the stringfrom which it hangs. The other versionis weighted and when attached to thebottom of the film holds it straightwhile drying.

Drying Cabinet. Kindermann makes aseries o f negative drying cabinets similarto the one illustrated. They all featurefiltered, forced air ventilation for dryingalmost any size o f rol l or sheet film. Thetemperature of the warm air can beadjusted, and the fan and heater areconnected to a timer that will shut theunit off at the end of a preselectedperiod. Kindermann also makes a

“Porta-Dri” model that has flexibleplastic sides so the entire unit can beeasily stored in a small space when notin use. The combination of rapid dryingand a dust-proof environment for thefilm makes these units extremely useful.

I70

Page 182: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 182/201

Print Dryers

Drying prints can be accomplished

naturally, or it can be accelerated

through the use of either increased

heat o r increased air flow. Th e con-

cerns in drying prints are their ten-

dency to curl when drying, the

archival quality of the print, the pro-

tection of the print surface, and the

effect of heat or other drying meth-

ods on the image.

The safest way to dry prints is to

squeegee the excess water from the

surface using a smooth squeegee so

the surface of the print is not

scratched. Lay the squeegeed print

on a fiberglass screen to have it dry

evenly and with minimal damage

(see “Building a Print-Drying Rack”

in Chapter 6).

If you have a high output that

would overload a natural drying sys-

tem, consider a dryer that uses air

flow, temperature, or a combination

of both to accelerate the drying

process. RC papers are very sensitive

to heat, as are color prints, and air

impingement dryers are best for

those materials. RC papers dry flat.

The curl in regular papers can be

minimized by using an electric or

double-screen dryer that holds the

print flat while drying. Curl can be

removed, when it does occur, by

heating the print briefly in a dry-mount press, or by stacking prints in

piles under a weight of books.

Squeegee. Squeegeeing excess wateroff of the pr int prevents it from gather-ing in pools o r drops and leaving spotson the print when it dries. Get a well-made squeegee and keep it clean; it can

easily scratch the surface of the print i fmistreated. This Paterson model is well-designed, with a handle large enough togive good leverage.

Roller Squeege and Drying Rack.

A handy, compact table-top unit thatremoves excess water from a print witha roller system and has a built-in rackfor drying the prints.

Print-Drying Rack. This RC print-drying rack dries up to 20 prints of

varying sizes. It is efficient and compactand prevents the prints from stickingtogether.

Page 183: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 183/201

Mounting

Many photographers mount their

work to keep it flat for viewing. How-

ever, chemicals or impurities in ad-

hesives can damage photographs,

and once mounted, the pho-

tographs are very difficult to removefrom the backing. So mounting is

recommended only for photographs

that do n ot need to be preserved for

a number of years. Valuable artwork

should be flattened and attached to

a mat with acid-free hinges instead.

Several mounting processes are

described below. From a conserva-

tor’s point of view, dry mounting is

the preferred process, because the

pH of the adhesive is within the ac-

cepted range. Whichever method

you use, it is important to mount on

100 percent rag, acid-free board;

chemicals in other boards will affect

both the photograph and the board.

Dry-Mount Press. The binding agent in dry-mounting i s a tissue that, with heat and

evenly applied pressure, permanently adheres the print to the backing.Dry-mounting requires the use of a dry-mount press like the one shown here

made by Technal. Presses come in several sizes, from 8 x I0 o 40 x 60. You willneed a press a t least as big as the board on which you are mounting the print. Youwill also need dry-mount tissue (there are different kinds for black and white, color,and resin-coated prints). Dry-mounting is a quick process and doesn’t involve messyadhesives that might accidentally get on the face of the print. However, it s notfoolproof. It s possible to ruin a print by trapping a bubble of air under it or by set-

ting the temperature too high.

Tacking Iron. The tacking iron i s anauxiliary dry-mounting tool. It s used tomount the photograph to the backing inone spot so it won’t slip out of placewhen you put it in the press.

I72

Page 184: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 184/201

Spray Adhesive. 3M’s Photo-Mountforms a permanent bond after pressureis applied with a rubber roller.

Print Positioner. The print-mountingpositioner made by Falcon is a timesav-ing device that helps you position theprint in the optical center of the boardwithout measuring or drawing lines.

PermalMount. PermalMount is asheet with adhesive on both sides. Theprocess s simple: stick the print to one

side of the card: trim off the extra card;peel off the protective covering on theback of the card exposing the adhesive;and apply pressure to mount the printto the backing. It is available for 8 x 10,I x 14, and I 6 x 20 prints.

I7 3

Page 185: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 185/201

Matting and Storing Prints

Because the surface of a photo-

graphic print is so easily damaged by

fingerprints, d irt, or scratches, a

good storage system for finished

prints is an essential part of preserv-

ing them. The major considerationswhen you’re choosing a system

should be whether you need to

transport your prints, or simply keep

them in your studio; whether you

will be matting them to make them

presentable for viewing, or storing

them without mats; and whether you

want to use archival methods to pre-

serve them.

For storage in the darkroom, the

best idea is to put each print in an

envelope to protect the surface, and

then place them all in a storage box

for further protection.

The most common envelopes

made for storing prints are glassine

envelopes. These protect the surface

of the print from damage, and

they’re fine for prints that aren’t

valuable. However, they are not

Portfolio Box. The portfolio box

shown here folds together in a clamshelldesign. Made of high-quality neutral pH

materials, it i s excellent for archivalstorage and display of matted o r unmat-ted prints. It s deep enough for eigh-teen matted prints and comes in threesizes t o accommodate I x 14, 14 x 18,and I6 x 20 prints or mats. The advan-tage of this kind of box i s its flexibilityfor carrying or folding out to provide avery attractive display. Available fromLight Impressions.

archival, because the acidic content

of both the paper and the glue can

damage the print over a long period

of time.

For archival protection, Light Im-

pressions supplies white storage en-velopes of Perma-Life paper in two

sizes,8 1/2 x 10 1/2 and 111/2 x 14

1/2.If you will be showing your prints

to people from time to time, you will

probably want to place each print in

a mat and backing, protecting the

print surface with a sheet of tissue

that can be lifted for viewing.

Interleaving tissue is an acid-free

tissue used for this purpose. It is

placed under the mat and over the

surface of the print. It can also be

used instead of envelopes between

unmatted prints in a storage box.

Light Impressions supplies it in sizes

from 11x 14 to 16x 20.

Drop-Front Storage Box. The drop-front storage box is made of archival-quality materials with metal corners tostrengthen the construction and elimi-nate the need for adhesives, whichmight damage the paper. Light Impres-

sions has them in two sizes: 15 x I I x 3and I 6 1/2 x 20 I12 x 3. The larger canbe divided into four 8 x 10 sections forstoring large numbers of unmattedprints. This box is the least expensive of

those illustrated here and is used moreoften for util ity storage than for display.

Wooden Boxes. The redwood andbrass portfol io box shown here is de-signed for transporting and viewingmounted work. The top and one side

detach for viewing prints, and the insideis sealed against wood vapors, which ar e

harmful to photographs. The strongconstruction, attractive materials, andeasy conversion from carrying case t odisplay box are the important featuresof this storage system available fromDepth of Field. All boxes are custom-made in any size you want.

ShippingCase. This one is not just a

storage box, but a shipping case. It’s

made of tough Vulcan fiber with heavy-gauge steel corners and a cardholderfor addressing the unit in transit. It

comes in three sizes-I I x 14, 14 x 17,I6 x 20, all 3 inches deep-from LightImpressions.

I 74

Page 186: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 186/201

Mat Boards

There are two kinds of mat board,

wood-pulp board and museumqual-

ity board. Wood-pulp board comes

in a variety of colors, but it is highly

acidic. The acid content will, over a

period of years, cause both the prin t

and the mat board itself to discolor

and become brittle. The alternative

is non-acidic museum board, usuallyof 100 percent rag content. Because

it contains no acid, it will not have

any adverse effects on the print.

However, it is more expensive than

ordinary wood pulp board, and it

comes in a very limited selection of

whites, neutral colors, and black. If

you want archival protection for

your prints, you must use acid-free

board for the overmat as well as for

the backing immediately behind the

print. Many photographers use 4ply

board for the overmat and 2-ply

board for the backing. In a frame, an

additional backing, such as corru-

gated cardboard or Fome-Cor, is

needed for stiffness.

Mat Knife. A mat knife s the mostbasic mat-cutting tool. It’s a good ideato get one with a retractable blade forsafety’s sake. You can also purchase ametal straight edge with a no-slip rub-ber backing from Light Impressions.

Paper Cutter. The guillotine-typecutter shown here is one of severalmodels designed to cut mat board aswell as paper. It’s also available with asafety guard.

Mat-CuttingTools

Cutting the outside of a mat is not

difficult. You can use a simple mat

knife and straight edge, or a paper

cutter designed to take mat board,

or the mat and glass cutter described

in the framing section of this book.

Cutting mat window openings is a

little more tricky, and because a

poorly cut mat will detract from theoverall effect of the picture, it is im-

portant to find a mat-cutting tool

with which you are comfortable.

Tools range from the inexpensive

Dexter cutter to the rather expen-

sive, but much more efficient, Kee-

ton Kutter.

It’s very difficult to cut profes-

sional looking circular or elliptical

mat openings with a simple hand

cutter. A sophisticated machine such

as the Keeton Oval Kutter is gener-

ally required.

Keeton Kutter. The most efficientand most accurate machine for cuttingmats is the Keeton Kutter. The barclamps the mat board tightly in placewhile you cut, and the cutting blade is

actually mounted on the straight edgeto ensure a straight cut. I t ’s quite ex-pensive, but probably worth the invest-ment if you cut a lo t of mats.

Dexter Mat Cutter. Of the simplehand-cutters, the Dexter is the leastexpensive and the most widely used.Us e a straight edge with a no-slip back-ing as a cutting guide. The blade can beclamped in place at any angle to allowstraight or bevelled cuts. Available fromBrookstone.

Mat Cutter. The cutter shown hereoperates on the same principle as theDexter, but it comes with it s ownstraight edge, mat guide, and measuringsystem. You can order it from Saun-

ders.

Attaching the

Photograph

Photographs may be held in place in

the mat with archivalquality photo

corners, or with an archival-quality

tape-never with masking tape or

cellophane tape. The most suitable

mounting tape is white linen tape, a

cloth tape with a water-activated

acid-free adhesive on one side. You

can get the photo corners or rolls of

tape from Light Impressions.

When using tape, attach the pho-

tograph to the backingwith only two

small squares of tape placed along

the top edge of the photo near the

corners. If it is taped along the sides

and bottom as well, it will buckle

with changes in humidity.

I7 5

Page 187: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 187/201

Framing

When choosing a frame, the first

thing to remember is that the frame

should not call attention to itself but

should focus the viewers’ attent ion

on the picture. With photographs,

simple frames with white or neutralcolor mats are generally most suc-

cessful. Th ere are several choices.

Clip frames, metal frames, and Dax

plastic frames are all quite contem-

porary looking and are available in

kits that are easily an d quickly assem-

bled at home. Wood frames come in

an infinite variety of profiles, colors,

and finishes, so you can choose a

frame that exactly suits the mood

and period of your photographs.

However, wood frames do take more

time to assemble, and require some

special tools if you plan to build

them yourself.

Whenever you are putting a pho-

tograph in a frame with glass, you

should also use a mat. Moisture can

condense easily on the inside of a

sheet of glass, and if the photograph

is in contact with the glass when this

happens, it can be ruined. The mat

provides a space between the surface

of the glass an d th e surface of the

photograph so that the photo won’t

be affected. Acrylic is less likely to

condense moisture, and therefore is

often used instead of glass when

framing unmatted pictures, but this

is not considered archival framing.

If you must frame without a mat

to get the visual effect you want, the

only archival solution is to use spac-

ers between the glass and the photo-

graph. A spacer is a thin strip of

wood or mat board attached to the

inside surface of the frame after the

glass is in place. The edges of thephotograph then rest against the

spacers instead of the glass. Nielsen

makes a metal frame with a spacer to

separate the glass from the photo-

graph.

Dax Frame. Of the ready-made frames,the Dax frame is the simplest and quickestto use. It s a clear acrylic box with anopen back and a slightly smaller cardboardbox that slips in to hold the picture inplace. All you have to do is mat your

photograph, or attach it to the innercardboard box. If you choose not t o matit, then slip it into the frame. Dax framescome in several standard sizes, from 5 x 7t o 24 x 30, which can be hung horizontallyor vertically. They come with clear plasticsides and an assortment of color finishes.All have a contemporary look. The Daxframe is especially convenient if you wantto change pictures often.

Metal Frames. Metal frames are quitecontemporary and easy to assemble. Theonly tool you need is a screwdriver. TheNielsen frame, shown here, is held to-gether by metal angles that slip into theslot at the back of the frame. Glass, mat,and backing are held securely against thelip of the frame by metal springs insertedafter the frame is assembled. Pre-cutlengths are sold, two t o a package, along

with instructions and assembly hardware,and you buy two packages to make aframe the size you want. Only a few stylesand colors are available in kit form; how-ever, you wil l find a much wider selectionif you go to a store that carries the com-plete line, and you can have them cut t oexactly the size you need.

Eubank Frame. Clip frames are another simple, easy-to-assemble framing alternative.The Eubank frame shown here, and the plastic version, the Uniframe, are sturdy andquite attractive. Clips hold the glass and backing ogether in eight places, and a string orwire on the back holds the clips securely in place and provides a means for hanging thecompleted frame. Kits that clip the glass to the backing n two or four places, such asBraquettes, Fast Frame, and Gallery Clips, are suitable for small pictures. But since theglass and backing end to separate over long, unsupported distances, larger pictures needto be clipped in eight places. Clip frames are adjustable and can be re-used on pictures ofdifferent sizes and shapes.

I76

Page 188: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 188/201

Do-It-YourselfFraming

Custom framing can be quite expen-

sive, but there are cheaper alterna-

tives for anyone who is willing to

spend some time framing. Do-it-

yourself frame shops will cut materi-

als to size for you and show you how

to assemble them yourself. If you've

never built a frame before, this is the

best way to begin, because you'llhave professional help. Or you can

invest in a few tools and set up your

own work space for cutting and as-

sembling frames.

You can cut framing materials

with fancy equipment or relatively

inexpensive tools and get good re-

sults either way. Th e main difference

with the more specialized tools is

that they make t he jo b easier an d

save you a lot of time.

The simplest and least expensive

tool to use for cutting wood molding

is a miter box. Because the angle of

the cut is crucial when you're build-

ing a frame, it's best to purchase one

with some kind of clamping device

for holding the saw. Some miter

boxes cut only 45"or 90" angles. So

if you might at some point want to

make six- or eight-sided frames, buy

one that will adjust to the appropri-

ate angles. You'll also need a good

sharp back saw, fourteen teeth per

inch or finer.Most professional framers use

choppers instead of miter boxes, be-

cause the chopper is quicker and

more accurate and makes a

smoother cut than does a back saw.

However, the chopper cuts only

wood, so many people who deal in

metal or plastic frames do all their

cutting with a power saw such as the

Keeton Kut-All Saw.

Frame assembly requires several

tools and supplies that you can pick

up in a hardware store if you don'talready have them: tack hammer,

nail set, wood glue, wire brads, hand

drill, and pliers. The only special

tool you need is a corner clamp. A

fitting tool, while not absolutely nec-

essary, will make the jo b easier.

Keeton Kutter. The ultimate device for cutting glass, mat board, and back-ings is the Keeton Cardboard and Glass Kutter. The piece to be cut sits onthe horizontal bar at the bottom, which also has a measuringguide on it. Theblade or glass cutter moves along a vertical track. A straight cut is guaranteed,and the time taken to measure is practically eliminated. It's expensive butworth it if you do a lo t of framing.

Square-Head Hammer. Wire brads

are used in the backof frames t o hold thecontents in place. The framing hammershown here is designed specifically fortapping those brads gently into place.Available from Brookstone.

Miter Trimmer. This miter trimmer,available from Brookstone, is one of thesimplest choppers available. You must f i r s t

rough-cut the molding a little longer thanyou want it, then trim it exactly t o sizewith the trimmer. It cuts any angle, from45" to 90".

similar to this one and quite a bi t moreexpensive.

Keeton makes a larger chopper that is

Fitting Tool. The fitting tool, also avail-

able from Brookstone, is used to squeezebrads into the back of the frame. Becauseit doesn't jostle the frame, you don't runthe risk of breaking the glass or weaken-ing the glued corners.

Corner Clamp. A corner clamp is

essential for holding the corners of theframe tightly in place while the glue setsup. The simple, inexpensive corner clampsavailable in most hardware stores are finefor most frames but are limited in the sizeof the moldings they can accept.

I77

Page 189: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 189/201

The Digital Darkroom

Page 190: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 190/201

I Contents

Introduction to the Digital

Digital Equipment

Printing the Digital Image

World

Page 191: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 191/201

Introduction to the Digital World

The digital revolution has de-

scended on photographywith all the

speed we’ve become used to in com-

puter-related progress. Remember

records? Those big disks of vinyl cov-

ered in grooves that could producethe scratchiest sound ever heard? It’s

possible that you’ve still got a bunch

of them and the turntable to play

them on, but now you just slip a CD

into your player and listen to the

clear, clean sound of digital music.

The ability to choose a song at ran-

dom, skip through it, fast forward or

back, program the sequence-what

luxury! And you have to go a long

way to damage them. Well, that same

sort of convenience, clarity, and sta-

bility is now available to any photog-

rapher who owns a computer.

I’m sure that most people have

become familiar with the phrase “to

digitize” thanks to the music indus-

try. Simply put, there are twoways to

store and display information: one is

“analog” or continuous, the other is

“digital”or discreet bits.An analog is

a continuous, unbroken stream of

information as in a curve on a

graph. There is an infinite amount

of information in the curve, since

you can extract that information at

infinitely small divisions. It gives, by

far, the greatest amount of informa-

tion. Digital information comes in

discreet amounts or levels as op-

posed to the continuously variable

analog information. There is a finite

amount of data, and that’s what

makes it possible to store and ma-

nipulate it o n a small personal com-

puter.

Digital creates the illusion of a

continuously variable analog inmuch the same way that movies cre-

ate the illusion of motion with dis-

creet still images. It’s a matter of

spacing. If the digital information is

made u p of steps that are sufficiently

close together, then the difference is

so small as to become unnoticeable.

Or at least that’s the theory. There

are musicians who claim they can

hear the difference between a digital

and an analog recording. If the steps

are not close enough together, it is

quite easy to tell a digital image from

a standard photographic image.

(The standard photograph is, to be

sure, a digital image, made up of dis-

creet clumps of silver. There are just

so many of them-more than any

but the very largest computers could

store and manipulate.) So you can

see where this is leading. The prob-

lem for digital photography, espe-

cially for the amateur, is how many

digits the image can be broken down

into and still be manageable. In the

computer world, the question is al-

ways “how big a ‘file’ can you deal

with?”

Image-file size, or the “resolu-

tion” of the image, is a function of

something called dpi or dots per

inch. This term reflects an effort to

retain some of the familiar terminol-

ogy used in the printing industry.

There, dots refer to the dots on a

printing screen that make up the

image: the more dots, the finer the

image. In mechanical printing, thesize of the dots as well as their den-

sity make up the variations of the

image. In digital imagery, it is the

height of the step, its value, and the

density of steps that make up the

variations of the image. The dots are

recorded by individual sensors

called charge couple devices, with

one sensor for each dot. On e reason

digital recording devices are so ex-

pensive is because of the large num-

ber of these sensors required to get a

high-resolution image-lots of dpi’s.

Each machine has an upper limit to

the amount of resolution it can

record or output. The higher the

resolution, the better the image

quality.

I8 0

Page 192: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 192/201

Adobe Photoshop. This computer screen displays an image being altered using

Adobe Photoshop. The background image is unmanipulated; the foreground shows

the image after it has been altered. N ot e that the large lamppost has been remove d.

181

Page 193: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 193/201

Digital Equipment

How do you digitize an image? How

do you get digital information into

your computer? You can do it di-

rectly by using a digital camera.

These cameras, which are becoming

more common an d less expensive bythe day, allow you to take and store

in the camera a number of pho-

tographs. This number depends on

the storage capacity of the camera

and the resolution of the image.

Many of the digital cameras allow

you to choose the resolution or dpi

of the image, and thereby the num-

ber of images you can store in the

camera. The higher the resolution,

for instance 600 x 600 dpi, the big-

ger the image file and the fewer the

images that can be stored. Some

cameras have removable storage car-

tridges that give you the ability to

take a virtually unlimited number of

photographs. You might even want

to take along a laptop and input, or

“download,” the photographs di-

rectly into the computer. The cur-

rent problem with affordable digital

cameras is the amount of resolution

they can provide. This level of reso-

lution is usually not enough to pro-

duce a highquality image, especially

when reproduced in a large size.

The method most people use to

have their photographs digitized is

to have them “scanned.” Traditional

formats, produced with a photogra-

pher’s old tried-and-true camera are

then subjected to the scanning

process. Transparencies, negatives,

or prints can all be scanned. A scan-

ner is a device that records your pho-

tograph in digital form. There are

two kinds of scanners: drum and flat

bed. Drum scanners are complex

and extremely expensive. They are

used mainly by service bureaus, busi-

nesses that provide digital input andoutput. The photograph is attached

to a rotating drum and then

scanned as it spins under the sen-

sors. Flat-bed scanners are much less

expensive and well within the range

of most commercial photographers.

The photograph is placed on the

bed of the scanner and is scanned by

a moving bar much like that in a

photocopy machine. Many scanners

allow you to preview the digitized

photograph , called the “scan,” be-

fore you enter it into the computer.

Then you can use the scanner’s soft-

ware for an initial manipulation of

the image for contrast, color, den-

sity, and so forth.

Another way of obtaining digital

scans of your photographs is to send

the film to a developing house that

will develop your film, scan the neg-

atives and send you back a CD full of

your pictures. You then put the CD

into your computer and access or

open any image directly into your

image manipulation software. Once

you have a digital image in your

computer, you can do virtually any-

thing with or to it. After all, you’re

just changing a number associated

with a dot.

When it comes to image-manipu-

lation software, there is really only

one: the great, the wondrous, the

ever-changing Adobe Photoshop.

~~

This program will allow you to play

with your image in standard ways

(contrast, color, density, cropping).

In addition, it will give you an almost

unlimited freedom to add, subtract,

twist, turn, and otherwise play withyour photographs.

Photoshop is quite expensive and

requires a computer with sizable

memory, both internal and external,

but there are a number of far less ex-

pensive programs that give you quite

a variety of things to do to your pho-

tographs. Some page-layout pro-

grams have image manipulation ca-

pabilities. Once you have a digital

image, you can import it in to almost

any document in your computer.

Page-layout programs allow you to

make documents combining pho-

tographs, illustrations, and text.

They are used extensively in the de-

sign industry, but they can also be a

lot of fun at home.

I82

Page 194: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 194/201

Digital Camera. The Epson Photo

PC 500 is a 640 x 480 dpi camera that

stores up to 30 images at maximum

resolution.

Digital Scanner. The Agfa Studio Star

is a 600 x I200 dpi, moderately-priced

scanner. Adapter for scanning trans-

parencies is optional.

I83

Page 195: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 195/201

Printing the Digital Image

Once you’ve altered or enhanced

your digital image, you will want to

show it to the world. You can have

people look at it on your computer

screen, but that’s not very conve-

nient. Instead, you’ll want to availyourself of one of the many output

options. There are printers that

workwith your computer to produce

a very credible image without spend-

ing a lot of money. Ink-jet and bub-

ble-jet printers are the most popular.

They allow you to use many kinds of

plain paper stock, such as watercolor

paper, to change the look of your

photograph. You can even put your

photograph on a transferable

medium and make t-shirts! A much

higher-quality image can be

achieved by using a laser printer.

Naturally, this higher quality is re-

flected in the printer’s price tag.The closest thing to a true photo-

graphic output is the dye-sublimate

printer. It is quite expensive, but it

gives a beautiful photographic print

on special paper. Again, no chemi-

cals are used, not even the inks of

the je t printers. Dye sublimate print-

ers use a film roll that must be re-

placed after a certain number of

prints have been “processed.”

If you want to make your own

prints, a machine called an image-

setter will make a continuous-tone

negative. Imagesetters are very ex-

pensive and are usually found only

in service bureaus. These machineswill also make slides, if you prefer to

view your photographs by projec-

tion.

In the context of digital imagery,

the entire concept of the traditional

darkroom has now been replaced.

No dark room, no chemicals, no

handling negatives, no touching at

all, except for keyboarding. A very

large change has been effected in a

very short period of time. But get

used to it-the digital world is here

to stay.

I84

Page 196: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 196/201

Ink Jet Printer. The Epson Stylist Color 500 is a 720 x 720 dpi plain-paper printer.

Dye Sublimate Printer. One of Kodak's dye sublimate printers and the specialpaper and thermal ribbon needed to print with it.An expensive unit, but imagine theluxury of adjusting an image with your computer and then making a print by justpressing a button! This type of equipment i s being constantly updated, and you maybe able to purchase a used one a t a reasonable price.

I8 5

Page 197: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 197/201

Index

Abbott, Berenice, 8-9

Accessories, wet-side, 128-29

Air quality, 110-1 1dust, 110

humidity, 110

temperature, 110ventilation, 110

converting from watts to, 81

having enough in circuits, 81

b P S

Baseboards

building adjustable enlarger, 108-9

determining shelf heights, 108

selecting easel shelf size, 108

Bathrooms, 28-29

enlargers in, 28

layout in, 28

sinks in, 28

working space in, 28

adjustable enlarger baseboards,

darkroom sinks, 94 9 5

darkrooms, vii, 52-87

insides of darkrooms, 88-115

light boxes, 104-5

print-drying racks, 100-101

sink stands, 96-97

Building

108-9

Burning (increasing exposure time),

152-53

Calculators, color, 164-65

Callahan, Harry, 4-5, 32Checklist, planning, 39

Chemical storage, 136

Cleaning negatives, 150-51

Closets, 24-25

counter tops in, 24

enlargers in, 24

lights in, 24

storage in, 24

ventilation in, 24

analyzers, 164-65

calculators, 164-65

darkrooms, 156-67

166-67

Color

drum and tank color processors,

FL4 color systems, 160-61

starter darkrooms, 158

consistent light sources, 162

filtration, 162

heat on negative planes, 162

voltage variations, 162

enlargers, 162-63

introduction to, 158-59

processors, 166-67

floor mats, 115

heaters, 114

phones, 114

stereos,115television, 115

Comforts, miscellaneous, 114-15

Control panels, modular electrical,

Controls, printing and exposure,

Counters

86-87

152-53

installing, 98-99

spaces, 32

tops, 24

drying-rack, 48-49

light-trap, 46-49

wet-side. 42-45

cutouts

Darkrooms

around the world, 12-21

building, vii, 52-87

air quality, 110-11

baseboards, 108-9

comforts, 114-15

counters, 98-99

darkroom sinks, 94-95

drying frames, 102-3

electrical wiring, 78-87

hanging doors, 58-59

insides of, 88-1 15

installing drains, 72-73

installing partitions, 56 5 7installing Sheetrock, 60-61

installing supply lines, 70-71

light boxes, 104-5

light-proofing, 112-13

lighting circuits, 90-91

lighting equipment, 92-93

mounting enlargers, 106-7

plumbing, 62-77

print-drying racks, 100-101

sink stands, 96-97

tools, 54-55

color, 156-67

designing, 34 51

dry-side cutouts, 42 4 3drying-rack cutouts, 48-49

elevations defined, 36-37

layouts, 36-41

light-trap cutouts, 46 49

planning checklist, 39

planning grids, 50-41

preparing elevations, 50-51

wet-side cutouts, 44-45

working drawings, 36

digital, 178-83

of famous photographers, 2-11

lighting, 90

starter color, 90

D i Loreto, Francesco (Chicco), 16

Digital darkrooms, 178-83

introduction to digital world,

180-81

printing digital images, 182-83

Digital equipment, 180-81

Digital images, printing, 182-83

Digital revolution, vii

Digital world, introduction to, 180-81

Disposal, waste, 136-37

Dodging, 153

Door frames, installing prehung, 58

Doors

hanging, 58-59

light-proofing, 112

Drains, installing, 72-73Drawers, light-tight, 113

Drawings, working, 36

Drum color processors, 166-67

Dry-side cutouts, 4 2 4 3

Dryers, 170-71

Drying frames, making, 102-3

Drying racks

building print, 100-101

cutouts, 48 49

Dust, 110

Dusting negatives, 150-51

Easel shelf size, selecting, 108

Easels, 146-47Electrical circuits

determining amps for, 81

how they work, 78

wiring, 8 4 8 5

Electrical control panels, modular,

86-87

Electrical work

materials for, 82-83

tools for, 82-83

calculating power requirements, 80

converting from watts to amps, 81

in darkrooms, 80-81

determining amps for circuits, 81introduction to, 78-79

defined, 36-37

preparing, 50-51

Enlargers, 24, 140-43

alignment, 140

in bathrooms, 28

building adjustable baseboards,

108-9

Electricity

Elevations

I8 6

Page 198: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 198/201

color, 162-63

construction quality, 141

filter drawers, 141

formats, 141

lensboards, 141

lenses, 140

light quality, 140-41

light source, 140

mounting, 106-7

negative flatness, 141

print size, 107

size of enlargements, 141

steadiness, 140

vibration reduction, 106

equipment, 138-55

easels, 1 46 47

exposure controls, 152-53

focusing magnifiers, 14 84 9

lenses, 144-45

negatives, 150-51, 154-55

printing controls, 152-53

proof printers, 154-55

evenness of illumination, 144

optical quality, 144

resolution, 144

Enlarging

lenses, 144-45

timers, 134

digital, 180-81

enlarging, 138-55

lighting, 92-93

processing, 11637

Exposure controls , 152-53

Equipment

Fans, light-proofing, 113

Floor mats, 115

Focusing magnifiers, 148-49

Frames, drying, 102-3

Framing photographs, 176-77

Grids, planning, 4 0 4 1

Hanging doors, 58-59

Harrod, Ron, 18-19

Heaters, 113-14

Humidity, 110

Installing

counters, 98-99

drains, 72-73

partitions, 5 6 5 7

building the room itself, 56

marking layout on floor, 56

prehung doo r frames, 58

Sheetrock, 60-61

supply lines, 70-71

Jackson, William Henry, ix

Kitchens, 2 6 2 7

Kodak RA color systems, vii, 160-61

Layoutsin bathrooms, 28

defined, 3 6 3 7

how to do, 38-41

marking on floors, 56

preparing, 42

Lenses, enlarging, 144-45

evenness of illumination, 144

optical quality, 144

resolution, 144

Life Magazine, 10

Light boxes, building, 104-5

Light-proofing, 112-13

doors, 112

fans, 113heaters, 113

light-tight drawers, 113

light-tight paper safes, 113

vents, 113

windows, 112

Light-trap cutouts, 46-49

Lighting

circuits 90-91; See also Electricity,

darkrooms, 90

general, 90

light table, 90

luminous tape or paint, 90

print-viewing lights, 90

safelighting, 90

equipment, 92-93

in closets, 24

workroom, 32

darkrooms

Lights

Magnifiers, focusing, 14 849

Mann, Robert, 20-21

Mats, floor, 115

Matting prints, 174-75

attaching photographs, 175

mat boards, 175

mat cutting tools, 175

Mazzo, Paolo, 16

Moroux, Phil ippe, 14-15

Mounting, enlargers, 1 0 6 7

Negatives

cleaning, 150-51

dusting, 150-51

storage of, 154-55

washers, 132

Paper safes, light-tight, 113

Partitions, installing, 5 6 5 7

Phones, 114

Photographers, darkrooms of famous,

Photographs, mounting, 172-73Pipes

2-1 1

identifjmg, 64

measuring length needed , 70

and tubing, 70

working with copper, 70

Placement, ideas for, 22-33

bathrooms, 28-29

closets, 24-25

kitchens, 2 6 2 7

spare rooms, 30-31

workrooms, 32-33

checklist, 39

grids, 40 4 1Plumbing, 62-77

analyzing, 64

building sinks, 94-95

darkroom planning and shopping,

64-65

easy way out, 74-75

installing drains, 72-73

installing supply lines, 70-71

measuring length of pipe

measuring pipe a nd tubing, 70

working with copper pipe, 70

Planning

L

needed, 70

introduction, 62-65

materials, 64-65modular systems, 7 6 7 7pipes identification, 64

roughing in the, 68-69

adapting off the main supply

lines, 68

installation, 68

shopping list, 66

tapping in to the system, 62

tools, 65

typical darkroom, 66-67

unique solutions, 74-75

Power requirements, calculating, 80

Print

dryers, 171drying racks, 100-101

finishing, 168-77

dryers, 170-71

framing, 1 7 6 7 7matting prints, 174-75

mounting photographs, 172-73

storing prints, 174-75

sizes, 107

washers, 132

I8 7

Page 199: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 199/201

Printers, proof, 154-55

Printing,

digital images, 182-83

and exposure controls, 152-53

correct exposures, 152

dodging and burning, 153

final prints, 152

work prints, 152

chemical storage, 136

roll-film tanks and reels, 130-31

sinks, 118-19

temperature regulation, 122-25

timing systems, 134-35

tongs, 126-27

trays, 126-27washers, 132-33

waste disposal, 136-37

water quality, 120-21

wet-side accessories, 128-29

Processing equipment, 116-37

Processors, color, 166-67

Proof printers, 154-55

Proofsheets, standardizing, 154

RA color systems, vii, 160-61

Recycling, 137

Reels, roll-film, 130-31

Roll-film

reels, 130-31

tanks, 130-31

Rooms, spare, 30-31

Safelights, 92-93

Savage, Naomi, 33Sheetrock, installing, 60-61

Shelf heights, determining, 108

Sinks

bathroom, 28

building darkroom, 94-95

stands, 96-97

varieties of, 44-45, 118-19

waterproofing, 95

Siskind, Aaron, 6-7Slavin, Neal, 33

Smith, W. Eugene, 10-11

Spare rooms, 30-31

Stereos, 115

Storage

chemical, 136

in closets, 24

in counters, 98

negative, 154-55

of prints, 174-75

in workrooms, 32

Supply lines, installing, 70-71

Table space, 32

Talbot, Henry Fox, vii

Tanks

color processor, 166-67

roll-film, 130-31

Television, 115

Temperature

air quality, 110

regulation, 122-25

ambient conditions, 122

water bath temperature, 122

water temperature, 122

Thermometers, 129

Tice, George, 33

Timing systems, 134-35

enlarging timers, 134

general timers, 134

Tongs, 12627

Tools

building darkrooms, 54-55

for electrical work, 82-83

mat cutting, 175

for plumbing, 65

Trays, 126-27

Trentotto, Famiglia, 16-17

Ventilation

air quality, 110

in closets, 24

Vents, light-proofing, 113

Vibration, reducing, 106

Visconti, Mimo, 16

Washers, 132-33

negative, 132

print, 132

Waste disposal, 136-37

Water quality, 120-21

air in water, 120

hard and soft water, 120

purity, 120

suspended solids, 120

Waterproofing sinks, 95

Watts, converting to amps, 81

Weston, Edward, 126

We t-side

accessories, 128-29

cutouts, 44-45

Windows, light-proofing, 112

Wiring electrical circuits, 84-85

Wooden frames, 102

Work triangles in kitchens, 26

Working drawings, 36 .Workrooms, 32-33

counter space in, 32

lights in, 32

storage space in, 32

table space in, 32

I8 8

Page 200: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 200/201

8 ocal Press

The Darkroom Cookbook

Steve Anchell

The Darkroom Handbook is the one source every photographer

needs for the recipes for both common and rare photographic

formulas. It provides the keys to unlocking creativity through the

mastery of the "ingredients" of photography- namely the

chemicals used to develop, fix, stop and tone.

1994 232pp comb 0-240-80196-2

The Darkroom Cookbook, Volume 2

Film Developing

Steve Anchell &

Bill Troop

The Darkroom Cookbook Volume 2: Film Developing is an up-to-date manual for the modern film develop-

ment techniques. While the original Darkroom Cookbook focused entirely on photographic chemicals and

formulae, his book concentrates on films, their characteristics, and the developers each requires for maximum

control of the resulting image

May 1998 176pp comb 0-240-80277-2

Post ExposureAdvanced Techniques for thePhotographic Printer

Ctein

Written by an expert printmaker,Post Exposure teaches the under-

lying principles needed to produce truly excellent photographyprints. Distilled from more than 30 years' experience and address-

ing both black-and-white and color, its purpose is to teach photog-

raphers the refinements of photographic printmalung- aking them

from making merely component prints to making excellent ones.

October 1997 192pp Paperback 0-240-80299-3

Available from al l better book stores or in case of difficulty call:1-800-366-2665 in the U.S. or +4 4 1865 310366 in Europe.

Page 201: Darkroom Handbook

8/15/2019 Darkroom Handbook

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/darkroom-handbook 201/201

Focal Press is a leading provider of quality information worldwide in all

areas of media and communications, including: photography and imag-

ing, broadcasting, video, film and multimedia production, media writing,

communication technology, theatre and live performance technology. To